A. General

1. The assessment of compliance of the Basel Core Principles for Effective Banking Supervision in the supervisory work of the Swedish Financial Supervisory Authority (Finansinspektionen; “FI”) was performed by Allan D. Fink of the Federal Reserve Bank of Chicago and Mr. Tuomo Malin of the Finnish Financial Supervision Authority.

B. Information and Methodology Used for Assessment

2. The assessment was performed on the basis of the Methodology of the Basel Core Principles and the Draft Methodology Document prepared by the IMF and World Bank titled Enhancing the Global Effort Against Money Laundering. The Swedish Financial Supervision Authority submitted a self-assessment of the Core Principles prior to the mission. Additionally, on request, the authority produced a self-assessment on the draft on money laundering. The main sources for the assessment were the laws and supervisory regulations and guidelines concerning credit institutions. Law texts were obtained on the web site of the Swedish Parliament, the English versions on the site of the Bankers’ Association. The supervisor’s regulations were, for the most part, available only in Swedish. Additionally, the assessors received relevant material from the central bank. Meetings took place with representatives from the main commercial banks.

3. The assessors did not encounter any major barriers in making their assessment despite the scarcity of documents available in English.

C. Institutional and Macro Prudential Setting, Market Structure Overview

4. In Sweden there are three different types of banks: commercial banks, i.e., limited liability banking companies, savings banks and a few cooperative banks. All these types of banks are entitled to engage in all types of banking activity. The number of banks has declined sharply as a result of mergers, a tendency that has been most marked among the savings banks. From some 450 savings banks of the 1950s, the number had decreased to 85 by the late 1990s. Since the middle of the 1980s, however, numerous new banks have been established in Sweden. The market structure can be described as two-tiered with five large banks (Handelsbanken, Skandinaviska Enskilda Banken, Nordbanken and Förenings Sparbanken as well as the Swedish subsidiary of a major Danish bank) having a combined market share of about 75–85 percent; the residual market is shared among around 100 smaller banks. The home market for Swedish banks has to a greater extent been seen to embrace not only the traditional Nordic area but the whole region surrounding the Baltic Sea.

5. The four major Swedish banks are very broadly held. The largest owners are the Swedish government (less than 20 percent in Nordea), the Wallenberg-led investment company Investor (some 10 percent in SEB), the employees’ pension fund (some 10 percent in Svenska Handelsbanken), and the former savings banks foundations (some 20 percent in Swedbank, which was earlier a savings bank, which merged with a cooperative bank and became a commercial bank). Approximately one third of bank shares are held by non-Swedes. The medium and small-sized banks are generally held by one dominating owner, which in turn may have a widely spread ownership, such as Skandia. All savings banks are non-profit organizations and they are held by foundations.

6. The Swedish Financial Supervisory Authority is a government authority responsible to the MoF. It exercises supervision over banks, credit market companies, and additionally e.g., insurance companies, insurance brokers and securities companies. The role of FI is to ensure that statutory regulations are complied with, that secure and sound practices are applied and that confidence is maintained in the stability and functionality of the financial markets. The cost of FI’s activities is defrayed out of charges levied on banks and other supervised entities. The FI’s annual budget is decided by the government. One of FI’s primary tasks is to promote satisfactory consumer protection; additionally the National Board for Consumer Complaints, a government authority, has as its role to offer an alternative to legal action in court in connection with disputes between consumers and business firms. The Board has a separate banking to consider disputes between banks or other credit institutions and their customers.

7. The Central Bank Act assigns to the Riksbank the responsibility to ensure a stable and efficient payment system. It also assigns to the Riksbank the responsibility for monetary and exchange rate policy (including the management of the gold and currency reserves), as well as managing the issue of notes and coins, providing a clearing function for banks as well as accepting deposits from banks and granting them loans. The Central Bank also functions as lender of last resort providing financial aid to banks experiencing liquidity problems.

8. The legal framework for the banking sector is provided in the Banking Business Act that contains provisions regulating the business a bank may engage in e.g., the granting of credit. The act also contains essential provisions concerning the tasks of FI in the supervision of banks. Commercial banks are also subject to the Companies Act. There are special acts for savings banks and cooperative banks (so-called members banks). The Act on Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures for Credit Institutions and Securities Companies contains rules on how to calculate the capital base and capital adequacy to cover credit risks and market risks. The act also includes provisions stipulating limits for the exposure of credit institutions in relation to their clients, and rules concerning consolidated supervision. The Act on Financial Operations has provisions on licenses for and the activities of credit market companies, i.e., limited liability companies which have received a license from FI to engage in financing activities, such as credit mortgage institutions and finance companies.

9. The Secrecy Act regulates to what parties and on what conditions FI is obliged to divulge confidential information. Disclosure is mandatory to the parliament and the government. Furthermore, information may be disclosed to the Public Prosecution Authority, the Police force, the Riksbank or to another supervisory authority. The government’s annual directive regarding the supervisor’s overall objectives and reporting obligations is publicly available. FI operational goals and objectives as presented in its annual plan are also publicly available. The performance of FI relating to its objectives is accounted for in the annual report, that is published and subjected to the review by the Swedish National Audit Office. Each year, as a result of its financial stability analysis, FI publishes a report to the government on the stability of the financial system. The Riksbank also publishes its financial stability reports twice annually.

10. FI is an independent government authority without outside interference in its operational functions. The authority has a description of the internal processes and procedures. A government committee’s proposition dating back to three years includes plans, as yet unimplemented, to increase the authority’s powers. The supervisor cannot, however, with the present level of remuneration compete with the private sector. To improve its capacity to supervise particularly the more complex activities of banks, e.g., related to market risks, the supervisor has to be able to increase its competitiveness as an employer. The renewed capital accord as well as the preponderance of financial conglomerates in the Nordic financial system put in question the adequacy of the supervisor’s human resources.

11. The profitability of the largest Swedish banks increased in 2000. The return on equity ranged between 22 percent and 24 percent, with the exception of the Nordea group (18.6 percent). Credit losses have been on very low level, however they increased to SKR 1.9 billion in 2000. Nonperforming loans went up SKR 4.5 billion to SKR 23.5 billion. The tier 1 capital ratio for commercial banks was 7.9 percent in June 2000, with a slight upward trend from the previous years. Credit growth has been most rapid on the part of households (8.1 percent up from 1999) while total lending to the Swedish public increased by 4.7 percent.

D. General Preconditions for Effective Banking Supervision

12. After the disbanding of the Bank Support Authority there have been no standing institutional arrangements for handling banking crises. New arrangements for the resolution of distressed banks have been dealt with in a Committee paper of 1998 where it was proposed that a bank would be placed into public administration where this is necessary in the interests of system stability or where reconstruction is warranted—otherwise the bank is to be declared bankrupt or put into liquidation. The government would be able to take control of a bank’s business without taking over ownership of the bank; there would be no option of a compulsory takeover. The new government authority, the Crisis Management Authority, would assume control of the running of the business of a bank by representing all of its shares at general meetings. A government guarantee could be issued in order safeguard that the bank in public administration would meet all commitments arising during the life of the guarantee. At the present time there is no institutional framework for problem bank resolution. In spite of the limitations on the guarantee in the proposal above, the moral hazard aspect can not be discarded, altogether. The government would find itself in a position where it would be effectively regarded as the guarantor of the bank in public administration.

13. The purpose of the Act on Deposit Guarantee Scheme is to improve consumer protection in connection with the public’s deposits at banks and certain securities companies by providing a guarantee for deposits of up to SKR 250,000 per customer at each institution. The act contains rules regulating which deposits are covered by the guarantee, when the right to compensation arises, and what fees shall be paid by the institutions covered by the guarantee. Administrative duties lie at the Deposit Guarantee Board.

Table 1.

Detailed Assessment of Compliance of the Basel Core Principles

Table 1.

Detailed Assessment of Compliance of the Basel Core Principles

Principle 1.	Objectives, Autonomy, Powers, and Resources An effective system of banking supervision will have clear responsibilities and objectives for each agency involved in the supervision of banks. Each such agency should possess operational independence and adequate resources. A suitable legal framework for banking supervision is also necessary, including provisions relating to the authorization of banking establishments and their ongoing supervision; powers to address compliance with laws, as well as safety and soundness concerns; and legal protection for supervisors. Arrangements for sharing information between supervisors and protecting the confidentiality of such information should be in place.
Principle 1(1)	An effective system of banking supervision will have clear responsibilities and objectives for each agency involved in the supervision of banks.
Description	The main laws concerning banking are the Banking Business Act and the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposure Act which contain the main prudential rules and provide the basis for the powers of FI. Separate laws are in place for other deposit banks (savings banks and cooperative banks) as well as finance companies and mortgage institutions. A decree by the government has been given on FI whereby are set the main objectives of FI, i.e., promoting financial stability and efficiency and improving consumer protection. FI must, among other things, perform supervision according to what is stated in laws or decrees, monitor and analyze developments in the financial sector, issue regulations and guidelines and make contributions in international cooperation, and assist the government with comments on, for e.g., new laws and research projects. In addition, a general decree on government agencies is applicable to FI. The Board of FI consists of 10 members with the Director General of FI as chairman. The Director General and other board members are appointed by the government for a determinate period of time. The composition of the board is not defined in laws or decrees. Accordingly, in its choice of members the government is only bound by the tradition according to which the members include representatives from the parliament, the Central Bank, other authorities and the financial industry. The Board’s duties are to convene extra shareholders’ meetings, issuance permits and restrictions of essential nature as well as important regulations that are not delegated to the Director General. Urgent matters may be decided by exchange of information between the Director General and the number of board members needed for a quorum. FI is the only competent authority for the supervision of banks. According to Section 3 of the decree on FI, the supervisor has to consult with Riksbank, the Swedish Competition Authority, the Deposit Guarantee Board, on matters specified in the decree. The modes of cooperation and ways of exchanging information are established in the law governing the confidentiality of information and the status of government agencies. The Consumer Agency is the sole organization with which FI has entered into a formal memorandum of understanding. After the banking crisis of the early 90s, the institutional arrangements concerning the resolution of problem banks have been disbanded. FI would in a crisis situation participate on an ad hoc basis with other relevant authorities, especially Riksbanken and MOF. Agreement on whether and under which terms to create a new institutional framework for crisis situations has not been reached. The government (MoF) is responsible for bringing Swedish financial legislation in line with the relevant EU directives. As a member country Sweden is obligated to implement the directives into its national legislation with parliamentary laws. The government issues an annual directive (regleringsbrev) regarding the supervisor’s overall objectives with reporting stipulations on the fulfillment of the objectives. The directions are publicly available (on FI’s web site and elsewhere). In order to achieve the general objectives, FI sets its operational goals and objectives in its annual plan, which is also publicly available. The goals and objectives are subject to internal review every four months. The total performance of FI relating to the over-all objectives is accounted for in its annual report, which is subject to review by the Swedish National Audit Office. The Director General of FI appears approximately once a year to make a statement before the Parliamentary Finance Committee. The supervisory measures that FI takes as against the banks are made public by the supervisor, subject to rules of confidentiality. Each year, as a result of its financial stability analysis, FI publishes a report to the government relating to the stability of the system. FI publishes regularly in cooperation with Riksbanken and Statistics Sweden official statistics regarding performance in banks and securities firms. FI also issues a quarterly publication (Sparbarometern) on assets and liabilities in the household sector.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	The laws and regulations on banking activities and their supervision are in place. The composition of the Board of FI is not regulated in law or other ordinances. The position of FI in relation to other public agencies in possible crisis situations is not defined in law.
Principle 1(2)	Each such agency should possess operational independence and adequate resources.
Description	FI is an independent authority with its own board. FI makes its own budget requests within the framework of the total state budget, which is put before the parliament each year. An amount equivalent to the approved budget is charged by FI to the supervised institutions. Within its budget frames and the overall objectives, FI is independent in performing its regulatory and supervisory functions. FI’s main objectives are financial stability and the promotion of consumer protection. The government yearly issues FI’s general objectives after consulting with FI. FI’s reporting obligations as to each of the objectives are also stipulated. The Director General initiates the yearly consultations by issuing to the government a draft for FI’s objectives (inriktningsbrev). In order to achieve the overall objectives, FI sets its operational goals and objectives without having to consult with the government. FI has instituted a set of ethical standards for its employees concerning e.g., confidentiality, situations with conflicts of interest, loans from supervised entities, additional occupations, and dealings in financial instruments. For the new capital adequacy rules FI has requested a budget increase of SKR 30 million. An increase of SKR 8,2 million was granted to the budget for 2002. It is the goal of FI to increase its staff by 36 persons during 2002-03. The major risk areas the personnel increase would be assigned to would be credit risk and operational risk (14 persons). The operations are based on coordination of risk analysis in specific risk areas and general supervision. One of the main supervisory objectives is to produce on a group-wide risk assessments of the 13 major financial groups. FI can freely dispense with the appropriations according to its budget with its items for, inter alia, salaries, training of staff, equipment, travels, etc. Of the total budget of SKR 133 million for 2001, personnel outlays constitute SKR 91 million (including SKR 1,8 million for training and SKR 4,7 million for foreign travel and SKR 0,5 million for domestic travel). IT costs for soft and hardware acquisitions are SKR 2,9 million. The head of FI can be appointed by the government for the maximum of two terms of six years each. He can be removed from office in mid-term only for reasons specified in law. Where the head of a government agency is removed from office, the reasons must be publicly disclosed.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	FI has made a motion to the government for a large increase in the number of specialists in its employ. The supervisor cannot, however, with the present level of remuneration compete with the private sector. To improve its capacity to supervise particularly the more complex activities of banks, e.g., related to market risks, the supervisor has to be able to increase its competitiveness as an employer. The relatively large increase in personnel coincides with FI implementing the new model for risk assessment.
Principle 1(3)	A suitable legal framework for banking supervision is also necessary, including provisions relating to authorization of banking establishments and their ongoing supervision.
Description	The responsibilities of FI as to banking supervision are defined in the Banking Business Act, Chapter 7. FI has issued a regulation on the licensing process. According to the Banking Business Act, FI’s Director General can decide to pass on a licensing decision to the government in cases of great general importance. The government cannot unilaterally take on itself an individual licensing matter. A bank must furnish FI with any information regarding its operations and any relevant circumstances that FI requests. FI may carry out investigations at banks at such times as FI considers necessary. According to Chapter 7 Section 2 the Banking Business Act, the government or authorized by the government, FI may issue regulations regarding information which a bank shall provide to the supervisor; safekeeping and inventory of securities and financial instruments; and crime prevention measures at the bank. The Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act likewise confers the supervisor powers to give detailed provisions.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	None
Principle 1(4)	A suitable legal framework for banking supervision is also necessary, including powers to address compliance with laws, as well as safety and soundness concerns.
Description	According to the Banking Business Act, FI may decide to enjoin the execution of a decision where a bank has taken a decision which is in contravention of the laws which regulate the banks or against the bank’s articles of association. When the decision has already been executed, FI may order the bank to rescind the decision, where possible. FI has, according to the Banking Business Act, full access to any information from the bank that FI deems necessary. FI may carry out inspections at banks at such times, as FI considers necessary to review compliance with internal rules and external laws and regulations. FI has the possibility to take actions against a bank’s decision if it is in contravention of relevant law or against the bank’s articles of association. According to Chapter 7 Section 23 the Banking Business Act, FI may issue orders or injunctions on pain of a conditional fine. FI may also revoke the bank’s charter or issue warning to a bank under specific circumstances.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	According to the preliminary paper by the Banking Law Committee of 1998, the supervisor’s powers of remedial action should be increased.
Principle 1(5)	A suitable legal framework for banking supervision is also necessary, including legal protection for supervisors.
Description	While the legislation contains no provisions for legal protection concerning explicitly the FI and its employees, civil cases and cases regarding claims for damages must always be addressed to FI and not to the employee. The Law on Damage Compensation states that the employer has normally to bear the cost of compensation for damage caused by error or mistake by its employees (Chapter 3, Section 2). An employer may seek damages from the employee, but this would apply only in exceptional circumstances, after taking account of the nature of the action that caused damage, the position of the employee, the interests of the person who suffered damage and other relevant circumstances. Employees may be addressed directly in criminal cases. The employee may be judged responsible, if the case is not insignificant, for professional misconduct according to Chapter 20 Section 1 of the Penal Code. Employees may be sentenced to prison for up to two years, or in case of gross negligence or criminal intent, up to six years. The employee may also be judged responsible, if not an insignificant case, for disclosing secret information according to the Secrecy Act.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	The supervisory authority and its employees can be considered to have legal protection for their actions taken in good faith in their office.
Principle 1(6)	Arrangements for sharing information between supervisors and protecting the confidentiality of such information should be in place.
Description	According to the Ordinance for FI, FI shall confer with Riksbanken in matters regarding monetary stability or matters regarding monetary and payment policy. FI shall in these matters provide Riksbanken with necessary information. According to the agreement between FI and the Deposit Guarantee Board, FI will disclose information to the Deposit Guarantee Board so that it can fulfill its duties. For example, FI will on demand give information about deposits and capital ratio in order for the Deposit Guarantee Board to determine the fee for the deposit guarantee. Furthermore, the Deposit Guarantee Board will among other things be informed about new institutions that have been established, branches in Sweden of foreign institutions, and also branches abroad established by Swedish institutions. A bilateral cooperation agreement is not a precondition to exchange information with an authority of another country. FI may, on request, disclose information to an authority if the Swedish Secrecy Act does not hinder a disclosure. However, a bilateral agreement may in more detail regulate the exchange of information between the authorities and it may specify how information may be exchanged on a regular basis. FI has signed MOU’s with the EU-countries where the Swedish banks have operations, and FI has recently entered into an MOU with Latvia. FI has initiated discussions or made overtures with authorities of other countries on drafting of MOU’s, inter alia, with supervisors in Lithuania, Poland, Estonia and the USA. In the MOU with each foreign supervisor, cooperation and information sharing is treated as an essential issue. According to Chapter 8 Section 5 of the Secrecy Act, the government may decide that secrecy applies to information that FI has received according to an agreement with a foreign authority. If a reference to such an agreement between FI and a foreign supervisory authority is added to a list annexed to the Secrecy Ordinance, confidentiality will be preserved at FI concerning information received according to the agreement. The government has so far always decided that secrecy applies to information that FI has received according to memoranda of understanding, and the relevant agreements have always been added to Section 1 c of the Secrecy Ordinance. Under specific circumstances the Riksbank may ask for and receive secret supervisory information. FI is obliged to deny any demand for confidential information in its possession. The Swedish Secrecy Act regulates if and how FI, is bound by secrecy. According to the Secrecy Act, secrecy shall apply to such activities of FI, which consist of the issuance of permits or supervision with regard to the banking and credit system, the securities market or the insurance business. Information concerning the business or management conditions of the person whom FI’s activities concerns, is protected by secrecy, if it can be assumed that economic losses would be entailed if the information should be disclosed. Furthermore, information concerning the economic conditions of personal circumstances of the client of a company under supervision by FI is protected by secrecy. Chapter 14 of the Secrecy Act provides the situations when disclosure is mandatory under Swedish law. Secrecy shall not hinder the communication of information to for example the Swedish Parliament and the Swedish government and another supervisory authority. Furthermore, confidential information concerning suspicion of crime may be disclosed to the Public Prosecution Authority, the Police force or to an authority which has to take action against the crime if imprisonment is prescribed for the crime and this is presumed to give rise to another sanction than fine penalty. Information that FI receives according to an agreement with a foreign authority cannot be disclosed if disclosure were in breach of the agreement.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	The rules of confidentiality regarding the information FI has access to in the discharge of its duties, as well the disclosure of such information, are in place. FI has yet to enter into MOU’s with some of the authorities in countries where Swedish banks have a presence.
Principle 2.	Permissible Activities The permissible activities of institutions that are licensed and subject to supervision as banks must be clearly defined, and the use of the word “bank” in names should be controlled as far as possible.
Description	The term “bank” is defined in Chapter 1 Section 1 the Banking Business Act as banking companies, savings banks, and members’ banks. Banking business may only be conducted following authorization (license) from FI, or in exceptional cases from the government. An authorization may only be given to banks. The permissible activities of banks are defined in Chapter 2 the Banking Business Act. The list corresponds to Annex 1 to the European Directive 2000/12/EC relating to credit institutions. A bank may engage in the following activities: 1. borrow funds, inter alia, by issuing bonds or other similar debt instruments; 2. grant and broker loans, inter alia, in the form of consumer loans and loans secured by real property or instruments of indebtedness; 3. participate in conjunction with financing, inter alia, by acquiring claims and leasing personal property; 4. negotiate payments; 5. provide means of payment; 6. issue guarantees and assume similar obligations; 7. participate in issues of securities; 8. provide financial advice; 9. hold securities in safekeeping; 10. conduct documentary credit operations; 11. act as a custodian institution for securities funds; 12. participate in sales of insurance services; 13. provide debt collection services; 14. provide bank safe deposit services; 15. conduct currency trading; 16. conduct securities business subject to the conditions prescribed in the Securities Operations Act; and 17. provide credit information subject to the conditions prescribed in the Credit Information Act. In addition, banks may conduct operations that have a natural connection with deposits or with operations as set forth in the list. Chapter 2 the Banking Business Act also states additional permissible activities that do not have a direct connection with banking business such as acquisition of shares and so on. Where a special cause exists, a bank may be authorized by FI to provide postal services. Further details are also issued in FI’s regulations and guidelines. No entity other than a bank, the Central Bank of Sweden, the Swedish General Mortgage Bank and foreign banking undertakings may use the word “bank” in its name or otherwise in conjunction with a description of its business. However, an association or other legal entity with a close affiliation to a bank may, with FI’s authorization, use the word “bank” in its name. According to Chapter 7 Section 21 the Banking Business Act, where any person conducts banking business without being licensed to do so, FI shall order such person to cease such operations on pain of a conditional fine. Where there is doubt as to whether the operations include deposits, FI may order the person conducting the operations to furnish any information regarding the operations required in order to determine whether deposit operations are being conducted. As to foreign undertakings, an order may be addressed to both the undertaking as well as any person conducting operations in Sweden on behalf of the undertaking. Banking business is defined in the Banking Business Act as operations which include the acceptance of deposits on account where the balance is determined in nominal amounts and is available to the depositor on short notice. Banking business may only be conducted following authorization and an authorization may only be given to banks. However, where an undertaking accepts customer funds on account, they do not constitute deposits provided the balance for each customer does not exceed SKR 15,000 and the balance is only available to the customer for payment for goods and services which are produced or sold by the undertaking; or by another undertaking in the same group or in the same group of undertakings with close economic affiliation or in connection with the closure of the account. According to Chapter 1 Section 2b the Banking Business Act, it is not considered to be a banking activity if an economic association conducts deposit operations, provided the association: receives deposits only from its own members; only intends to use members’ deposits to satisfy the financing requirements of the members; only accepts natural persons as members; and has no more than 1,000 members. No new association may use the legal provision as a basis for pursuing these activities without a license. An undertaking which offers deposits on account in accordance with Chapter 1, Sections 2 a and 2 b, the Banking Business Act shall specify in conjunction with its advertising, displays, and other marketing of account services that the balance on the account is not covered by the deposit guarantee in accordance with the Deposit Guarantee Act. Prior to execution of an account agreement, the account operator must inform the depositor that the balance on the account is not covered by the deposit guarantee. The information must be provided in writing. The Marketing Practices Act shall apply in the event an undertaking fails to provide the information or other information that is of particular significance from a consumer perspective.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	The term bank has been given a definition in law. The supervisor may order a person to stop the banking activities it has commenced without a legal license on the pain of a conditional fine. To conduct unauthorized banking activities is not criminalized. A banking law committee has drafted a preliminary version for a revised banking act. The proposal includes a definition for activities that need authorization that would be more adaptable to changing products and techniques in the market.
Principle 3.	Licensing Criteria The licensing authority must have the right to set criteria and reject applications for establishments that do not meet the standards set. The licensing process, at a minimum, should consist of an assessment of the banking organization’s ownership structure, directors and senior management, its operating plan and internal controls, and its projected financial condition, including its capital base; where the proposed owner or parent organization is a foreign bank, the prior consent of its home country supervisor should be obtained.
Description	The criteria for licensing banks is set in Chapter 9 the Banking Business Act. The criteria set in law correspond to Directive 2000/12/EC the Credit Institution Directive. Some additional criteria are set in the Banking Business Ordinance. Furthermore, FI has issued a guideline with information about the requirements concerning an application for a banking license. The basic criteria for issuing licenses, such as soundness, fit-and-proper test of the Board of Directors and of qualified shareholders, are examined in the ongoing supervision of the institution. The capital adequacy rules are upheld through the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act. According to Chapter 7 Section 1 the Banking Business Act, a bank must furnish FI with any information regarding its operation and circumstances requested by FI. FI may reject the application for a banking license if the essential criteria set in law and regulations are not met. If an application for a banking license is not complete, the applicant may asked to complete it according to FI’s instructions at the risk of the application being rejected. The applicant has the right to express its opinion before a rejection. Where the company will have a close affiliation with a third party, the articles of association may only be approved by FI and a license be granted where the relations will not impede the effective supervision of the bank. Furthermore, FI may reject a bank’s plans to outsource its activities if this would impede the effective supervision of the bank. Chapter 8 the Companies Act regulates the management of a limited company. The Companies Act that has to be followed also by banks stipulates, among other things, the responsibilities and duties of the Board of Directors. FI has issued regulations and guidelines regarding the internal control in banks. The regulations and guidelines state in more detail the responsibility of the bank’s Board of Directors. An independent audit function shall also be set up within the bank. The major shareowners of a new bank are evaluated by FI according to the same principles as are adopted in the on-going evaluation of ownership control according to Chapter 7 Section 10 the Banking Business Act (see also Chapter 4). The bank must give information to FI regarding the complete ownership structure. If a bank belongs to a group, the type of business the other entities in the group are engaged must be reported as well as the exact amount of shares they are holding. An economic entity as a founder of a new bank must provide its profit and loss statement as well as the consolidated statement for the group. A minimum initial capital amount of 5 million euros is stipulated for all banks. According to the Banking Business Act, a bank’s capital base may never be less than the amount that was required as initial capital. According to the Banking Business Ordinance, prior to commencing operations a bank must submit to FI a certificate by a chartered accountant that the minimal capital as stated in Chapter 9 Section 4 the Banking Business Act has been fully paid. FI evaluates the proposed Board of Directors and the managing director, both when they are proposed in an application for banking license and during on-going business. Chapter 9 Section 3 the Banking Business Act stipulates that a charter shall be granted where the persons who will constitute the company’s boards of directors or serve as the managing director or the acting managing director possess sufficient insight and experience in order to participate in the management of a bank and are otherwise suitable for such a task. The guidelines FFFS 1998:14 issued by FI gives more detailed information of the fit-and-proper-test. A charter is not granted if a member of the Board of Directors or the managing director or his deputy has to a significant extent failed to perform his obligations in commercial operations or in other financial affairs or has been convicted of a serious criminal offence. All members of a bank’s senior management are not subject to such a fit-and-proper test. According to the Banking Business Ordinance, a bank’s operating plan has to be submitted in connection with an application for a license. The plan must include a description of the projected operations of the bank. FI reviews that corporate governance and internal controls of the bank are in accordance with the principles set out in law and in the guidelines by FI. FI monitors that the institution have written procedures for important spheres of activity and adequate internal control mechanisms. Particularly, there must be a description of risk monitoring and management of credit risk, interest rate risk, and exchange and liquidity risks. FI guidelines require that internal regulations for the bank’s Board of Directors be drawn up. FI has also issued regulations and guidelines regarding the prevention of criminal activities connected with banking activities. According to the Banking Business Ordinance, a prognosis for the bank’s economic results for the next three years must be submitted to FI. The forecast must be drafted for both the bank and the group that the bank is going to be part of. There must also be an analysis of the capital requirements for the different risk areas. If a foreign banking company which maintains its registered office in a country within the EEA intends to establish a branch in Sweden, it is not required to a obtain a license from FI. FI receives notification from a competent supervisory authority in the undertaking’s home country which contains prescribed information. The procedure in law corresponds to that set forth in the Credit Institutions Directive. As to foreign banking companies from outside the EEA intending to establish a branch in Sweden, a license issued by FI is needed. Prior to issuing a license, FI follows the policy of asking the home country authority’s opinion in order to make sure that the planned business may be assumed to fulfill the requirements of sound banking operations. As regards foreign banking companies intending to establish a subsidiary in Sweden, an application for authorization must always be submitted to FI. If the owners are foreign physical persons or foreign legal entities, it is FI’s policy to contact the foreign supervisory authority in order to determine the suitability of the foreign owners of the bank. No requirement to obtain the foreign authority’s statement of no objection is stated in law. If FI determines that the license was knowingly based on false information, FI can ask the bank for corrections. If on the basis of the false information the sound development of the bank’s operations may be expected to be jeopardized and the bank’s management has been proved to be unsuitable to exercise such operations to which the charter relates, the bank’s charter may be revoked or the bank may be given a warning. The assessment of the application by FI is not regularly directed to the ability of the shareholders to supply additional financial support. There are no explicit rules and regulations regarding the composition of the Board of Directors. The general fit-and-proper tests of the members of the Board of Directors make it possible for FI to see to that the board is properly composed. The Board of Directors is required to have a broad competence. The fit-and-proper test is of a formal character and is mostly related to the question of the members not being convicted of crimes. No special arrangements are in place for monitoring the progress for new entrants. An inspection is normally made within one year after the bank has been given a license. The inspection is being made in order to monitor the bank’s business and to determine that the supervisory requirements are being met.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	The standards for a banking license are stipulated in laws and ordinances as well as FI’s guidelines. The fit and proper test do not concern all the members of a bank’s management, i.e., only the members of the Board of Directors and the managing director and deputy managing director are subjected to fit and proper testing. There are no detailed criteria for assessing the suitability of management. The economic situation of the principal shareholders is assessed only through public financial statements. FI, although not required by law, in practice consults the foreign supervisor if a foreign bank from outside the EEA wishes to establish a branch or subsidiary in Sweden.
Principle 4.	Ownership Banking supervisors must have the authority to review and reject any proposals to transfer significant ownership or controlling interests in existing banks to other parties.
Description	In the Banking Business Act a “qualified holding” is defined as a direct or indirect ownership in an undertaking where the holding represents 10 percent or more of the share capital or the voting capital or where the holding otherwise renders it possible to exercise significant influence over the management of the undertaking. FI has issued guideline FFFS 1998:14 on the monitoring of qualified holdings, i.e., ownership control. A direct or indirect acquisition of shares or interests in a bank which causes the acquirer’s total holdings to amount to a qualified holding may only be made with the explicit prior consent of FI. The same applies to acquisitions which involve an increase in a qualified holding so that it amounts to or exceeds 20, 33, or 50 percent of the share capital or the voting capital for all shares or interests or which result in the bank becoming a subsidiary. (Where the acquisition has occurred as a result of division of joint marital property, by inheritance, by will, corporate distribution, etc., consent for retaining the shares or interests must be applied for by the acquirer within six months from the time the shares or interests were obtained). Consent shall be granted to the acquisition where it may be assumed that the acquirer will not hinder the sound development of the bank’s operations and where the acquirer is otherwise suitable to exercise a significant influence over the management of the bank. Consent may not be granted where the acquirer, to a significant extent, has failed to perform his obligations in commercial operations or in other financial affairs or has been convicted of a serious criminal offence. Where the acquisition would result in close affiliation between the bank and a third party, consent shall be granted only where the affiliation does not hinder an effective supervision of the bank. FI may prescribe a certain period within which an acquisition must be completed. FI must be informed in the event that any person intends to divest himself of a qualified holding or such a significant part thereof that the holding will accordingly be less than any of the limits as specified above (20, 33 or 50 percent). Where a legal entity holds a qualified holding in a bank, it shall inform FI as soon as possible concerning any changes to its management. Where any legal or physical person which holds a qualified holding of shares or interests exercises, or may be deemed to be able to exercise its influence in a manner which hinders sound development of the operations of the bank, FI may determine that such a person, at general meetings, may not represent more shares or interests than those which correspond to a holding which is not qualified. This shall also apply where such a holder, to a significant extent, has failed to perform his obligations in commercial operations or in other financial affairs or has been convicted of a serious criminal offence. Where a person which holds a qualified holding of shares or interests fails to submit an application for consent to an acquisition, FI may determine that such person, may not represent the shares or the interests at general meetings to the extent they exceed a qualified holding until consent has not been obtained from FI. Where any person, in contravention of a decision by FI, possesses a qualified holding of shares or interests, such person may not represent the shares or interests at a general meeting to the extent the holding is in contravention of the decision. FI may order such a person to divest himself of a sufficient number of the shares or interests in order for the holding to be no longer qualified. An owner may also be ordered to divest himself of shares or interests if the holding is in contravention of FI’s decision. Where a bank has a close affiliation with a third party and such an affiliation hinders the effective supervision of the bank, FI may order the holder of shares or interests which gives rise to close affiliation to divest itself of a sufficient number of shares or interests to put an end to the close affiliation. According to Chapter 7 Section 13 a the Banking Business Act, where a legal entity holds a qualified holding in a bank, the entity shall inform FI as soon as possible of any changes to its management. FI does not on a continuous basis review the financial information of the principal shareholders of the bank if not motivated by specific reasons. A bank shall notify any acquisition or divestment that will affect the qualified holdings to FI as soon as possible. A bank shall submit an annual statement to FI containing the names of persons who hold a qualified holding of shares or interests in the bank and the amount of such holdings.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	None
Principle 5.	Investment Criteria Banking supervisors must have the authority to establish criteria for reviewing major acquisitions or investments by a bank and ensuring that corporate affiliations or structures do not expose the bank to undue risks or hinder effective supervision.
Description	According to Chapter 2 Section 5 the Banking Business Act, a bank may acquire another bank’s business, provided the acquisition is not deemed to be prejudicial to the public interest. If the acquisition relates to all or a significant part of the business, an authorization by FI is required. A bank may, equally following authorization, acquire shares or interests in a Swedish or foreign bank or in a Swedish or foreign non-banking undertaking if the acquisition may be deemed to be beneficial for the banking system or the general public. The same applies to guarantees or subordinated loans issued by such companies. A bank may be authorized to acquire shares or interests in a Swedish or foreign insurance company, and a savings bank or a cooperative bank may be authorized to acquire shares in a Swedish insurance company, if the acquisition is included as a part of the organization of the operations. As to real estate or other property, in addition to what a bank needs for its own business operations, a bank may acquire such property in order to secure a claim. Property acquired shall be disposed of as soon as deemed appropriate taking into account the market conditions, however without giving rise to a loss to the bank. In addition to holdings in banks, insurance companies and real estate property, and property that has been acquired as collateral, a bank may acquire shares equal to 30 percent of its capital base. The total amount of holdings in and loans to one company, may not exceed an aggregate of 5 percent of the amount equivalent to 30 percent of the bank’s capital. The limits are applied to all companies belonging to the group with the exception of insurance companies and their subsidiaries of nonfinancial nature. Within the limits above (30/5 percent rule) a shareholding may not, without the consent of FI, exceed 5 percent of the voting capital for all the shares in an individual company. Where the bank is part of a group, the limitation shall apply to the group’s total shareholdings. However, shares that are held by insurance undertakings within the group or by subsidiaries of insurance undertakings shall be disregarded. If any of the limits are exceeded, the holding or the obligations shall be disposed of to the extent of the excess as soon as appropriate. The rules regarding capital base and capital requirement in the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act and in the regulation FFFS 2000:6 by FI can be considered to hinder acquisitions if they will so severely affect the capital base and the capital adequacy so they will fall below stipulated levels. Banks and other companies in a group shall possess such administrative and accounting routines which ensure effective verification of compliance with the provisions the act. If adequate standards are not followed, FI shall order such an undertaking in a group responsible for group-based accounting to take appropriate measures in order to rectify the situation. When a bank has a close affiliation with a third party and the affiliation hinders the effective supervision of the bank FI may, according to Chapter 7 Section 14 b the Banking Business Act order the holder of shares or interests which gives rise to the affiliation to divest itself of a sufficient number of shares or interests. In cases where a prior approval by FI is not needed, there is no requirement to make a notification.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	Laws set limits for investments in other undertakings. FI’s consent is needed for large individual acquisitions. In laws and regulations there are, however, no requirements as to reporting to the supervisor of certain types of investments.
Principle 6.	Capital Adequacy Banking supervisors must set minimum capital adequacy requirements for banks that reflect the risks that the bank undertakes, and must define the components of capital, bearing in mind its ability to absorb losses. For internationally active banks, these requirements must not be less than those established in the Basel Capital Accord.
Description	All EU directives on capital adequacy are implemented through the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act and regulation issued by FI concerning capital adequacy and large exposures (FFFS 2000:6). The Basle Capital Accord with amendments has been complied with. The rules on capital adequacy apply not only to internationally active banking companies but also to the following institutions: savings banks, cooperative banks, credit market companies, securities companies, and the Swedish Ship Mortgage Bank. The EU directive on the own funds of credit institutions is fully implemented through Chapter 2 the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act and Chapter 3 of the regulation (FFFS 2000:6) of FI. Capital adequacy is calculated on solo and consolidated basis according to Chapter 6 of the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act. The provisions set forth in Chapter 2, Section 2 regarding capital requirements for credit risks, in Chapter 2, and sections 3-5 regarding capital requirements for market risks, shall also apply to a financial group of undertakings. A financial group of undertakings shall provide information on the companies which make up the group to the extent and within the time frame stipulated by FI’s guidelines (FFFS 2000:7) on the reporting of qualified holdings and subsidiaries, etc. If the composition of the financial group of undertakings is changed during the course of a current financial year, information concerning the changes shall be provided on the aforementioned form by the end of the quarter in question (closing date). Chapter 7 Section 12 the Act on Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures states that when an institution or a financial group of undertakings has a capital base which is less than the minimum amount required FI shall order the institution or the mother company in a group to take appropriate measures in order to rectify the situation. Where FI issues injunctions pursuant to this Act, FI may make such orders subject to conditional fines. FI can issue a warning and then revoke the banking license if the capital ratio has not been raised within three months to the legal minimum (Chapter 7 Section 16 of the Banking Business Act). FI may grant an extension to the time period. Chapter 16 of the regulation by FI concerning capital adequacy and large exposures concerns reporting: all institutions and financial groups of undertakings shall provide the information requested on the “Capital adequacy report” form, in Appendix 3, on March 31, June 30, September 30 and December 31 (closing dates). The reports shall reach FI no later than the last banking day in the month after each closing date. The supervisor is not empowered by law to set minimum requirements higher than the legal minimum depending on the conditions under which the banking system and individual banks operate. The supervisor does not effectively determine that banks have an internal process for assessing their overall capital adequacy in relation to their risk profile. FI monitors the adherence of banks to the capital ratios that they have declared as their goals. FI has informal contacts on the matter with a bank’s management. A bank’s capital base may not be less than the amount which was required at the time of licensing. In accordance with Chapter 9, Section 4 the Banking Business Act, a bank company must have a restricted equity which, at the time of the decision regarding a charter, amounts to not less than five million euros. Chapter 5, Section 4 of the Annual Reports of Credit Institutions and Securities Companies Act contains provisions concerning what constitutes restricted equity. Corresponding stipulations are in the Savings Banks Act and the Members banks Act.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	The capital adequacy requirements are in line with the Basle Accord. The supervisor has no legal powers to require a ratio higher than the legal minimum on the grounds of higher risk content in a bank’s business or the general operating environment.
Principle 7.	Credit Policies An essential part of any supervisory system is the independent evaluation of a bank’s policies, practices, and procedures related to the granting of loans and making of investments and the ongoing management of the loan and investment portfolios.
Description	Section 3 of the general guideline (FFFS 1995:49) of FI concerning credit risks in credit institutions and securities companies require that the board of the bank establish credit policies, practices and procedures. The board of the bank should according to Section 10 in the guideline (FFFS 1999:12) on management, internal information and internal control also issue guidelines for the internal audit on how to monitor the adherence of the credit policies, practices and procedures. The audit function should report direct to the board of the bank and to the managing director. In the general guideline it is also required that the board should ensure that policies, practices and procedures and review of risks are sufficient. Regarding credit risks a bank should have a specific controller function regularly monitoring the credit risks according to Section 15 in the general guideline (FFFS 1995:49). Control should be directed, in particular, to compliance of credit policies and instructions, identification, measurement, and reporting of credit risks. The quality of credit procedures and monitoring should be reported to management on a continuous basis. FI verifies, through periodic on-site examinations the presence of policy and instructions and how these are implemented and monitored within the bank. At on-site examinations the adherence to the stipulation of the general guideline (FFFS 1995:49) is assessed. In Chapter 2 Section 17 of the Banking Business Act there is a requirement that credits be extended to connected parties on an arm’s length basis on normal terms applied in the bank’s business. In certain cases FI has powers to determine to which parties the rule is to be applicable. Banks are expected to create a specific list with all physical and legal entities belonging to “connected or related parties”/ the group and, if credits are granted, with specifications as to size and terms and conditions. The list must be handed over to FI on request. In Section 14 in the guideline (FFFS 1995:49) on credit risks it is required that the board of the bank establish an internal communication system enabling the board to have access to all relevant information on the credit function and that all relevant persons and bodies within the bank receive the information on necessary for their duties. The general guideline (FFFS 1999:12) by FI also requires that the board should establish an information system providing relevant information about the business activities at any time. It is also stated in Section 6 of the guideline that unless otherwise stipulated, information must be reported to FI in the format it is available through the bank’s internal communication system. In Chapter 7, Section 1, the Banking Business Act it is stated that a bank has to provide FI with requested information about its business activities and related circumstances, and FI is vested with the authority to make on-and off-site examinations whenever it deems necessary. Legally there are no formal requirements for the banks to have in use various levels of decision-making. In practice all banks apply segregated levels of decision depending on the risks and the sort of business area concerned. The articles of association of a bank establish the general guidelines for granting of credits and indicate possible limitations. Accordingly, the credit policy that has to be established according to guideline (FFFS 1995:49) must be in line with the articles of association. Procedures and delegation of powers in connection with the granting of credits are to be described in the credit instructions. It must be stated in the instructions which decisions must always be made by the board. Section 14 in the guideline (FFFS 1995:49) requires that the board should establish a management information system providing relevant and well structured information about handling and granting of credits and related risks. Section 6 in the guideline (FFFS 1999:12) requires that the board of the bank establish an information system providing relevant information about the business activities at any time. In Chapter 4 Section 8a in the Regulation (FFFS 2000:18) concerning the annual reports of banks it is required that each bank monitor all its problem credits, disregarding the type of borrower or the domicile of the borrower. Monitoring has to take place at least in connection with the annual report and interim reports; a loan is to be treated as sub-standard if the creditor is financial difficulties, the loan is in default, or a bankruptcy or a restructuring seems imminent. The limit structure and decision making process of a bank sets limits for credits to individual counter parties.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	FI has given guidelines for the setting of a bank’s credit policies and internal instructions. For the performance of on-site supervision the supervisor has issued a manual.
Principle 8.	Loan Evaluation and Loan-Loss Provisioning Banking supervisors must be satisfied that banks establish and adhere to adequate policies, practices, and procedures for evaluating the quality of assets and the adequacy of loan-loss provisions and reserves.
Description	According to Section 10 in the guideline (FFFS 1995:49) by FI on credit risks there must be written instructions concerning the review of individual credits. Credit limits should be reported and reviewed on an annual basis. Accordingly, credit limits should be presented and approved at least once a year by the same authority within the bank that initially approved the original credit limit. In connection with the review an asset/risk classification should be made. Regarding problem credits or credits with higher risk than normal it is each bank’s duty to evaluate and classify such credits according to risk. Decisions regarding provisioning are made jointly by the bank and its external auditors. A review shall be made at least at the end of each financial year according to Chapter 4 Section 8, a–g, of FI regulation concerning annual reports (FFFS 2000:18). In Chapter 2, Section 4, page 5, of the Annual Reports Act (1995:1554) approves only provision made on an individual credit basis, i.e., a bank may not make provision for a whole sector. FI monitors the provisioning at on-site examinations when FI requires the bank to present a list of the 10 largest exposures and a list of its 10 riskiest exposures. In addition to this FI can request a list for the loans in arrears for 60 days or more. The bank’s policy regarding asset/risk classification and provisioning shall be in line with current accounting practices as provided in the Annual Report Act (1995:1554), Chapter 4 in the Annual Reports of Credit Institutions and Securities Companies Act (1995:1559) and Chapter 4 in the Regulations and General Guidelines (FFFS 2000:18) by FI concerning annual reports of credit institutions and securities companies. The external auditor and the auditor appointed by FI regularly review the policy and monitor the implementation. Such a review must be made at least once a year. FI monitors and reviews, through on-site examinations, bank policies concerning identification of problem credits and provisioning. The system for asset/risk classification and provisioning applies to both on and off balance sheet exposures according to Chapter 4 in the guidelines (FFFS 2000:18) and in Chapter 4 of the Annual Reports of Credit Institutions and Securities Companies Act (1995:1559). FI requires banks to have policies and instructions in order to safeguard a realistic market value of the assets after provisioning. However, FI does not verify that policies and instructions implemented by a bank are sufficient to guarantee that the value of an asset after reservations made and/or write-offs actually reflects the actual market value. This is instead primarily verified by the bank’s external auditor in cooperation with the auditor appointed by FI based on appropriate rules for evaluation provided in Chapter 4 Section 1 of the Act on Annual Reports of Credit Institution and Securities Companies and in Chapter 4 of the Regulations and General Guidelines (FFFS 2000:18) by FI concerning annual reports of credit institutions and securities companies. According to Section 11 in the general guideline (FFFS 1995:49) by FI concerning credit risks, a bank should establish a system enabling analysis of the structure of the whole credit portfolio, the quality and its development over time. It is the responsibility of each individual bank to implement appropriate procedures and sufficient organizational resources. Regarding problem credits and collecting past due loans FI monitors whether a bank has appropriate/ sufficient resources for the ongoing oversight of problem credits and for collecting past due loans. FI ‘s unit of statistics receives quarterly information from banks on problem credits. Collecting past due loans is an integrated and normal part of credit handling by banks. The handling of problem credits and collecting past due loans within the bank is regularly reviewed in connection with FI’s on-site examinations. FI does not have legal powers to require a bank to strengthen its lending practices or credit granting standards, or to strengthen its overall financial strength. Sections 4 and 8 in the General Guidelines (FFFS 1995:49) concerning credit risks require that credit policies contain guidelines for sound credit. FI may not legally require a bank to alter the level of loan loss provisions. However, FI makes recommendations with respect to banks’ overall credit standards and provisioning practices. Rules and limits concerning provisions are set in Chapter 4 of the Act on Annual Reports and the regulation (FFFS 2000:18) by FI on annual reports of credit institutions and securities companies. FI’s unit for statistics receives information problem loans and provisioning on a quarterly basis in accordance with Section 2 in Regulation (FFFS 2000:23) concerning quarterly and yearly reporting of financial accounts. Sections 8 and 10 of the guideline (FFFS 1995:49) on credit risks require that instructions be set up for assessing of collateral in connection with the granting of new credits and when credit exposures are reviewed. The Annual Report Act, the Act on Annual Reports of Credit Institutions and Securities Companies and the 4 Chapter in regulation (FFFS 2000:18) by FI concerning annual reports of credit institutions and securities companies require that collateral shall be reviewed at least annually. Credit limits should be reported and reviewed at least annually according to Section 9 in the guideline (FFFS 1995:49) by FI. Chapter 4 Section 8a in the regulation (FFFS 2000:18) by FI concerning annual reports of credit institutions and securities companies states when a loan shall be identified as impaired. A loan is classified as impaired on the basis of information of the creditor’s financial difficulties, and if the loan has not been serviced according to contract; interest payments in arrears for more than 60 days is given as a strong indication. A substandard loan is valued according to the likely repayment expectations which is based on either the future discounted cashflows, the realistic value of collateral or the market value of the receivable. The valuation of collateral is required to reflect the net realizable value. Collateral is required to be valued at current value, which according to Chapter 4 Section 5 in the regulation (FFFS 2000:18) is realizable/ market value less the estimated transaction costs. The current value equals the market value when such has been established. If no market is established the current value has to be based on various estimations. Loans are required to be classified when payments are contractually 60 days in arrears, judged from the original terms of the loan according regulation (FFFS 2000:18) by FI. Refinancing of loans that would otherwise fall into arrears does not lead to improved classification for such loans. Rules for restructuring loans and declassification of loans to normal status are stipulated in Chapter 4, Section 8 f and g, in regulation (FFFS 2000:18) by FI. Chapter 4, Section 8 c, in regulation FFFS 2000:18 by FI requires that valuation, classification and provisioning for credits should be conducted on an individual basis. Loans should be valued individually unless they form a group of small homogeneous loans according to Chapter 4 Section 10 of the regulation FFFS 2000:18. If they form a small homogeneous group the bank is requested to justify the basis of general provisioning through historical data, statistics or other relevant information. No general writedowns/provisions are accepted except for the “homogenous groups” of credits.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	The supervisor has no legally based authority to require a bank to strengthen its lending practices, credit-granting standards, level of provisions and reserves. The supervisor has neither binding powers to make a bank adopt policies that will affect the overall financial strength if it deems the level of problem assets to be of concern. However, the banks generally follow FI’s recommendations concerning credit policies and practices.
Principle 9.	Large Exposure Limits Banking supervisors must be satisfied that banks have management information systems that enable management to identify concentrations within the portfolio, and supervisors must set prudential limits to restrict bank exposures to single borrowers or groups of related borrowers.
Description	Chapter 5, Section 2, of the Act (1994:2004) on Capital Adequacy and Large Exposure defines the term” group of customers.” Section 9 in General Guidelines (FFFS 1995:49) by FI concerning credit risks in credit institutions and securities companies require that each individual bank include guidelines regarding “limits for related group of borrowers” in its credit instructions. The Act on Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures for Credit Institutions and Securities Companies and Regulations and General Guidelines (FFFS 2000:6) by Finansinspektionen concerning capital adequacy and large exposure sets the limits on exposures towards a single borrower or a closely related group of borrowers. Large exposures must be reported to the supervisor. These are defined to be equal to 10 percent or more of the capital base against one counterparty or a group of customers forming one counterparty. An exposure against one counterparty may not exceed 25 percent of the capital base. The sum of the large exposures has to be less than 800 percent of the capital base. The rules apply both to on- and off- balance exposures. FI monitors large exposures through the reports and on-site examinations. FI’s guideline FFFS 1995:49 states that a bank’s internal instructions must have provisions for credit monitoring. The reporting lines must also be established. It is the duty of the board to see to that an information system on credit policies and adjacent risk management is functioning. It has been decided at FI that as from 2002-01-01 reporting should also include concentrations to industry sectors (FFFS 2001:11). Reporting is currently made on a semiannual basis but reporting should take place as from the beginning of 2002 on a quarterly basis. Where the exposures exceed any of the limits set forth above, the institution responsible for group-based accounting shall notify without delay to FI. The authority may establish a certain period of time during which the exposures must be reduced to the permitted limits. If the exposures are not reduced to the permitted levels FI shall order the institution to take appropriate measures to rectify the situation. All Swedish banks must adhere to the definitions described in the Act on Adequacy and Large Exposures and Regulations and General Guidelines (FFFS 2000:6) by FI concerning capital adequacy and large exposures. No deviations from the limits are acceptable according to the law.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	Supervisory reports on large exposures are currently produced on a semi-annual basis. From 2002 onward reports will be made on a quarterly basis. Reporting will from the beginning of 2002 include information on exposures to sectors.
Principle 10.	Connected Lending In order to prevent abuses arising from connected lending, banking supervisors must have in place requirements that banks lend to related companies and individuals on an arm’s-length basis, that such extensions of credit are effectively monitored, and that other appropriate steps are taken to control or mitigate the risks.
Description	Connected lending is regulated in Chapter 2 Section 17 of the Banking Business Act where a comprehensive definition of “connected or related parties” exists. The following persons are included in the definition: 1. a member of the Board of Directors; 2. a delegate in a management position who, alone or together with a third party, is authorized to determine lending matters incumbent on the Board of Directors; 3. an employee who hold a senior position within the bank; 4. shareholders or owners of interests other than the State with a holding equal to at least three percent of the issued share capital; 5. a spouse or cohabitee of a person referred to above; or 6. a legal entity in which such persons as referred to above have a significant financial interest in their capacity as owners or members. Loans may not be extended on terms and conditions different from those normally imposed on customers. FI has discretion to make a judgment about connectedness as to items 2 and 3 above. Each individual bank has to create a specific list including all physical and legal entities belonging to the group and when credits are granted on what terms and conditions and to what amount. The list must be handed over to FI on request. There is no formal recommendation that credits to connected parties be handled and/or subject to approval by a body of a certain level in a bank’s hierarchy. It is stated that such credits shall be handled and approved in accordance with the normal procedure in the bank. Sections 2 and 4 of the guideline (FFFS 1998:22) by FI concerning handling of ethical questions require that each individual bank establish ethical guidelines regarding granting of credits. The guideline requires in particular that banks have systems set up for monitoring credit granting out of moral, ethical and legal perspectives. It is stated in Section 8 of the guideline concerning credit risk (FFFS 1995:49) that the same person is not to have both credit-granting functions and customer account responsibilities. Chapter 2 Section 17 of the Banking Business Act requires that credit granting to “connected and related parties” shall correspond to normal terms and conditions applied by the bank. FI has no authority to set limits to loans to connected parties or deduct such loans from capital when assessing capital adequacy. The total amount of loans to connected parties shall be handled on the same basis as loans to other borrowers of the bank, and is limited only by the rules in the Act on Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures. The act also requires that the board of a bank be able to identify the cases of connected lending. FI has followed a policy of requiring banks to have in the specification the names of all physical and legal entities identified as connected or related parties and the terms and conditions and the amount as well as the total amount. FI does not on a continuous basis obtain information on connected lending from banks. Chapter 2 Section 17 of the Banking Business Act provides a definition of a connected party. In individual cases FI has authority to determine who is to be included. The size of the lending to a connected parties is not limited in special rules but it is ultimately set by the general rules in the Act on Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	The rule of arm’s length and the concept of connected parties are established in law. There is no requirement that credits to connected or related parties should be decided at a certain level. FI has no authority to set individual limits to connected lending or deduct loans extended on concessionary grounds from the bank’s capital. Although authorized to do so in law, FI has not deemed it necessary to issue regulations on the register of connected lending. No arrangements have been made for regular reporting to the supervisor of connected lending on an individual or aggregate basis.
Principle 11.	Country Risk Banking supervisors must be satisfied that banks have adequate policies and procedures for identifying, monitoring, and controlling country risk and transfer risk in their international lending and investment activities, and for maintaining appropriate reserves against such risks.
Description	The FI determines through onsite and offsite inspections that banks’ policies and procedures give due regard to the identification, monitoring and control of country risk and transfer risk. Country risk and transfer risk is integrated as a part of the total credit risk. Section 14 in the guideline (FFFS 1995:49) by FI on credit risks requires that the board of a bank should establish a management information system providing relevant and well structured information about handling and granting of credits and related risks. The guideline does not specifically mention country risks. FI verifies through on–site examinations that the banks have adequate information systems, risk management systems and internal control systems. No general provision for country or transfer risk is permitted in the law and regulations. Provisioning may only be made for credits identified as problem credits according to Chapter 4 Section 8h in the regulation (FFFS 2001:19) by FI concerning annual reports. Each credit shall be evaluated individually. It is also stated in the regulation that provisioning, if any, shall be stated in the annual report. The bank decides the appropriate provisioning for each individual credit and the auditor verifies the provisioning. Riksbank provides upon request FI with information on country risks by bank.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	Finansinspektionen receives and evaluates country risk and transfer risk on a quarterly basis on the basis of information derived from quarterly reports. FI has no specific guidelines concerning country risk. Finansinspektionen has access to the reports given by the banks to the Riksbank regarding country risk exposures to individual countries. A bank decides the appropriate provisioning for each individual credit and the auditor verifies the provisioning.
Principle 12.	Market Risks Banking supervisors must be satisfied that banks have in place systems that accurately measure, monitor, and adequately control market risks; supervisors should have powers to impose specific limits and/or a specific capital charge on market risk exposure, if warranted.
Description	The directive on the Capital charge for market risk (CAD 1) was implemented in January 1996 by the Act on Capital Adequacy and Large exposures. FI has issued the regulation (FFFS 2000:6) concerning capital adequacy and large exposures. In 2000 FI implemented general guideline (FFFS 2000:10) concerning management of market and liquidity risks in credit institutions and investment firms. Section 6 of the general guideline stipulates that banks should have written policies and instructions concerning identification, measuring, reporting, monitoring and control of market risk. FI’s guideline (FFFS 1999:12) concerning management, internal information and internal control also deals with the issue of policies. Section 4 of these general guidelines stipulates that the Board of Directors should see to it that the management and control of risks in the bank are arranged in a satisfactory manner. Policies for relevant risks should be issued for this purpose. FI monitors the compliance of the laws, regulations and general guidelines through the analysis of reports and by carrying out on-site supervision. In the on-site supervisory work inspectors are guided by relevant manuals. Section 7 of FI’s general guideline (FFFS 2000:10) on management of market and liquidity risks stipulates that banks must have limits for market risks. The limits should be set for the bank as a whole and for position taking units. Limits should be set for an operational unit as a whole and for different trading desks, products and individual traders. FI examines banks’ limits and limit setting policies and procedures through the on-site supervision work. For those banks’ that have authorization to use the Internal Models Approach for market risk capital requirements, FI has the power to set the multiplier above the stipulated 3 subsequent to performing a qualitative valuation of a bank’s risk management systems (Chapter 11 Section 7 in FI’s regulation on capital adequacy and large exposures, FFFS 2000:6). At present no Swedish bank has the authorization to use the Internal Models Approach for market risk capital requirements. Two banks have applied for an authorization and FI is currently in the process of evaluating these models. Apart from the above the supervisor has no powers to impose a capital or specific limits on market risk exposure. Section 10 of FI’s general guidelines (FFFS 2000:10) concerning management of market–and liquidity risks stipulates that banks should have adequate systems in place for controlling and reporting of market risk on a daily basis. Section 6 of FI’s general guidelines (FFFS 1999:12) concerning management, internal information and internal control stipulates that the Board of Directors should see to it that there is an information system in place which at all times produces relevant information about the business. Section 4 of the same general guidelines stipulates that policies should be reviewed internally on an on-going basis. FI examines banks information systems, risk management systems and internal control systems through the on-site supervision process. For this purpose inspectors have relevant manuals to conduct their work. Chapter 4 Section 12 of regulation on capital adequacy (FFFS 2000:6) stipulates that positions in the trading book shall be marked to market on a daily basis for measurement of capital charge. Further, Section 9 of FI’s general guideline (FFFS 2000:10) concerning management of market- and liquidity risks stipulates that market valuation, made independently of position taking units, should be undertaken on a daily basis for the trading book. The valuation should be based on complete, precise and updated information about positions. Banks’ valuation models and data used in the valuations are examined through the on-site supervision process. Relevant manuals are in place to assist inspectors in this work. A bank which has the authorization to use the Internal Models Approach for market risk capital requirements shall perform stress test and on an annual basis evaluate its entire risk management system for market risks according to Chapter 11 Section 4 in FI’s regulation (FFFS 2000:6). Section 8 of general guideline (FFFS 2000:10) also deals with this issue. Banks’ with large and complex exposures should perform gap-analysis, sensitivity analysis etc. It is also stipulated that banks that are using Value at Risk models internally should perform stress test and scenario analysis. In the on-site supervision work FI examines banks stress tests and scenario analysis. The market risk team consists of three persons, each with two to three years of experience at the supervisory authority. Two of the risk analysts have a master degree in financial economics with mathematical emphasis, and the other has a master degree in economics. Two staff members work with capital adequacy questions, and are members of the Models Task Force of the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision. No one of the staff members have a background in the industry. The members of the market risk team also get the opportunity to attend in-house as well as external courses; more recently for example an internal course in financial mathematics with a focus on market and credit risk modeling techniques. Section 5 of FI’s guideline (FFFS 2000:10) on market and liquidity risks stipulates that it is the responsibility of the managing director to secure a balance between the bank’s present business strategy and the level of risk incurred. The managing director’s responsibility is also to have guidelines and regulations issued; to have sufficient resources available for managing and monitoring risks; and to maintain systems and standards for measurement of risk and return, reporting and internal control. Through on-site supervision FI seeks to examine the senior management’s understanding of market risks inherent in business lines/products traded as well as senior management’s understanding of implications of the risk management information. Section 11 of the guideline stipulates that reports to the Board of Directors and the managing director should at least cover risk exposures, limit utilization, returns, results of stress test and back-testing etc. FI examines the quality of management information through the on-site supervision process and also reviews the assumptions used in stress tests scenarios. At present no Swedish bank has authorization to use the Internal Models Approach for market risk capital requirements. Two banks have applied for an authorization and FI is currently in the process of evaluating the models. It is FI’s judgment is that it has the adequate knowledge and skills to evaluate and follow up these models.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	None.
Principle 13.	Other Risks Banking supervisors must be satisfied that banks have in place a comprehensive risk management process (including appropriate board and senior management oversight) to identify, measure, monitor, and control all other material risks and, where appropriate, to hold capital against these risks.
Description	The responsibility of the board and the management of a company are governed by the Companies Act Chapter 8 where it is stipulated that it is the responsibility of the board to make sure that the company is organized in such a way that accounting, management of assets and other financial conditions are be controlled in a safe manner. According to the general guideline regarding control, internal information and internal controls the board shall make sure that the institution has an organization that is appropriate; inter alia the functionality of the institution’s regulations, systems and procedures in the areas of risk control, monitoring and follow-up on risks. The following risks are mentioned in the general guidelines; credit and counterpart risks, market risks, liquidity risks, IT and other technical risks, administrative risks and legal risks. General guidelines related to specific risk areas are the those issued on credit risks (FFFS 1995:49) and market–and liquidity risks (FFFS 2000:10). FI has issued regulation (FFFS 1998:11)on the reporting of interest risk exposures. Through on-site investigations, FI can form an opinion of to what extent the institutions have implemented the general guidelines. FI has drafted internal guidelines used for assessing the different risk areas. The Act on Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures regulates that the minimum requirement of capital to risk-weighted assets is 8 percent for all credit institutions. FI does not have a mandate to prescribe a higher rate of capital coverage. Section 44a of the general guideline on Annual reports in credit institutions and securities companies (FFFS 2000:18) prescribes that the institution has to give an account of the exposures related to financial and other risks, for example operational and legal risks. The institutions do not report to what extent they carry out foreign liquidity transactions and nor the volume of the transactions. In examinations and through the provisions of the general guideline on market–and liquidity risks (FFFS 2000:10) FI addresses the question of currency risks in the management of a bank.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	FI has issued general guidelines on management of market risk and internal controls. FI has no supervisory standards on exchange and operational risk. FI is in the process of giving reporting guidelines concerning liquidity. FI has no powers to require a bank to hold capital against risks other than market and credit risk.
Principle 14.	Internal Control and Audit Banking supervisors must determine that banks have in place internal controls that are adequate for the nature and scale of their business. These should include clear arrangements for delegating authority and responsibility; separation of the functions that involve committing the bank, paying away its funds, and accounting for its assets and liabilities; reconciliation of these processes; safeguarding its assets; and appropriate independent internal or external audit and compliance functions to test adherence to these controls, as well as applicable laws and regulations.
Description	The Companies Act Chapter 8 determines the responsibilities of the Board of Directors concerning organization and administration. The board is responsible for the company’s organization and it has to see to that administrative affairs are properly arranged. Particularly, monitoring of the company’s accounts, the bank’s treasury, and the general economic performance belong to the board. The board shall issue written instructions on the frequency and the type of reporting that is to be delivered to the board. The Act also provides that the responsibilities of the Board of Directors concerning division of duties shall be determined in a working plan. FI’s general guideline concerning control, internal information and internal controls (FFFS 1999:12) determines that it is the board that is responsible for having reliable procedures and information systems in place, in order to maintain internal control but also in order to analyze and evaluate risks. The general guidelines concerning credit risks (FFFS 1995:49) and general guidelines concerning preventive measures of crimes (FFFS 1996:8) also emphasize the importance of internal controls and the responsibility of the board. FI’s guideline 1999:12 states that the board must see to that risk monitoring is arranged in a satisfactory manner. In addition to general guidelines for risk management there must be special instructions for managing and controlling of risks inter alia in the following risk areas: credit and counterparty risk, interest rate, foreign exchange and liquidity risk, IT and other operational risks, and administrative and legal risks. Internal control systems must be built so as to assure correct and complete accounting. Control routines must be established that provide information of deviations from internal guidelines. Security risk pertaining to proprietary information and physical controls must be arranged; IT security must be safeguarded to enable the bank to continue its operations uninterrupted. Sharing of duties and responsibilities must be arranged in a manner that prevents a single person from making independent decisions without outside scrutiny (four eyes principle). The general guideline concerning reports about appointed members of the boards of directors and the senior management (FFFS 1998:13-14) determines that FI has to be provided with information about the members of management. FI has the legal authority to require changes in the composition of the board and management only in connection with an application for banking license. FI does not continuously carry out any investigations in order to make sure that the competence of directors or senior management is satisfactory. As part of on-site inspections, especially concerning internal control systems, FI determines that there is an appropriate balance in the skills and resources between control functions and operative functions. The general guideline FFFS 1999:12 states that all credit institutions shall have an independent audit function. Independent of operative functions, the audit must be subordinated directly to the board or the managing director. In all cases, internal auditors must report to the board. The board shall issue instructions to internal audit as to its duties and reporting procedures. As a part of on-site inspections, especially concerning systems of internal controls, FI examines whether the internal audit function has appropriate independence, sufficient resources, and has the authority to carry through all investigations and to obtain all information that its required to discharge its duties. FI also examines that there are audit plans, work routines and reporting lines in place. By the Swedish banking act FI has the authority to obtain all information that is needed for the supervision. In connection with on-site inspections FI requires reports of the audit function for its perusal. In Section 6 of the general guideline (FFFS 1999:12) it is stated that unless otherwise stipulated information must be reported to FI in the form it is available through the bank’s internal communication system. It is customary that board members are non-executives representing different backgrounds, inter alia major owners of banks.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	FI is not empowered to require a change in the constitution of aboard due to shortcomings in the skills and knowledge of board members.
Principle 15.	Money Laundering Banking supervisors must determine that banks have adequate policies, practices, and procedures in place, including strict “know-your-customer” rules, that promote high ethical and professional standards in the financial sector and prevent the bank being used, intentionally or unintentionally, by criminal elements.
Description	The legal framework for anti-money laundering is provided in the Banking Business Act and the Act on Measures against Money Laundering. Regulations and general guidelines issued by FI which set out requirements on banks regarding inter alia high ethical standards, crime prevention and measures to hinder money laundering are mainly the following:) regulation concerning measures for the prevention of money laundering (FFFS 1999:8), regulation on crime prevention in banking (FFFS 1996:8), guidelines on principles for dealing with ethical issues in institutions under supervision (FFFS 1998:22), guidelines concerning management, internal information and internal controls (FFFS 1999:12), guidelines concerning reporting of incidents of high importance (FFFS 1999:7). The Act and the regulation on the prevention of money laundering pose requirements to banks regarding policies and instructions for customer identification and record keeping. Identity is to be checked on the commencement of a business relationship. Checks are to be made whenever a transaction exceeds SKR 110,000. Banks licensed in another EEA country are exempt from the rule. If there are grounds for assuming that the party is not acting on his own behalf, steps have to be taken to establish the identity of the originating party. A check shall always be made if there are reasons to suspect a case of money laundering. Documents relating to a transaction are to be kept for five years after the business relationship came to an end. FI’s regulation requires banks to have an internal register that can be used by administrating officers as a source of customer information. FI’s regulation states that the scrutiny of transactions should follow the same principles regardless of the fashion a transaction has been initiated. Special vigilance should be observed when scrutinizing transactions with countries where there are difficulties in obtaining information or whose legal system for combating money laundering have serious deficiencies. Sweden participates in the FATF exercise on Non cooperative Countries or Territories, NCCT. Institutions are required to conduct intensified due diligence when dealing with such countries. The FATF “black list” has been submitted to all institutions covered by the Act. FI’s regulation (Section 3) states that it is mandatory to appoint a person with explicit responsibility for ensuring that all relevant anti-money laundering measures (control systems, work routines, reporting procedures, training programs) are implemented and in accordance with legislation, regulations and instructions. The compliance officer must be a member of management. The regulation states that the board or executive management for the bank shall provide instructions on, e.g., the decision making and reporting procedures for suspicious transactions. There are to be checklists and manuals to provide indications of money laundering. Feedback must be given to the originating entity within the bank on whether notification to the FIU (Financial Intelligence Unit) of police has been made. It is recommended that decisions regarding reporting a suspicious transaction to the FIU should be taken in a centralized manner. The bank’s appointed central compliance officer has the responsibility for the implementation and good functioning of the reporting duties. On a daily basis the function often is often delegated to a security unit as part of the tasks that are undertaken by the bank’s security organization. FI does not require the foreign branches of banks to report cases of suspected money laundering. However, according to Section 7 of FI’s guidelines on money laundering, banks should report to FI of cases where local regulations prevent the bank from applying its anti-money laundering policy consistently on a global basis. In the guidelines on incident reporting (FFFS 1999:7) there is a list of incidents including suspicions of internal or external crime which are expected to be reported to FI if the incident is on a level of considerable (negative) importance. There is also the broader reporting duty of the external auditors (the BCCI-directive) which is applicable to crime. External auditors’ reporting duties involve under certain conditions a wide range of suspected crimes including money laundering in accordance with the Companies act (Chapter 10 sections 38-40). The suspected crimes shall be addressed to the prosecutor’s office, but if a bank is involved FI is expected to be notified as well. In the Act on Measures against Money laundering it is stated that bank staff can not be held liable for the reporting of suspicious transactions done in good faith (Section 10). FI conducts both on-site and off-site inspections with the aim to check the compliance of anti-money laundering measures in banks. On-site inspections are conducted in the context of general inspections or with a focus explicitly on anti-money laundering measures and crime prevention/protection. FI has conducted within a year five inspections of anti-money laundering practices in banks; no major shortcomings or grievances have been detected. As a part of the manual for operational risk, the supervisor has drawn up internal guidelines examinations of anti-money laundering practices. Regarding the enforcement powers FI can revert to the measures enumerated under CP 22. Intentional or gross negligent failure to comply with some essential requirements of the Act on Measures against Money Laundering is a criminal offence and punishable with a fine (the Act Section 14). The secrecy Act, Chapter 1 Section 3, limits the extent to which information, which is subject to confidentiality, may be shared with a foreign financial regulator. It also depends on whether criminal proceedings have been initiated or not. FI has entered into MOUs with a number of foreign regulators, where are set out the procedures for information sharing. In the guidelines FFFS 1988:22 there are given recommendations on ethics policies that should cover in detail how to deal with ethical policy issues. Sweden is a member of the Financial Action Task Force and has endorsed and implemented the FATF 40 recommendations. A self assessment exercise done in 2001 shows that Sweden is in full compliance with 26 of the 28 mandatory recommendations. The shortcomings are related to the missing fit and proper tests of new staff involved with anti-money laundering measures and the fact that foreign exchange offices and money transmitting firms are not subject to FI’s supervision. Section 10 of the regulation (FFFS 1999:8) requires banks to have an ongoing training program on matters concerning money laundering. All employees handling matters concerning the Anti Money Laundering Act shall be kept continuously informed of current developments of the field. If FI learns of transactions which may be deemed to point to money laundering it must inform the FIU of the matter. FI is able to share information with the relevant judicial authorities on the conditions outlined in the Secrecy Act (1980:100).
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	The relevant laws and regulations provide the legal and institutional framework for combating money laundering. To supervise the compliance of the laws and to assess efficiency of the measures, in addition to its own examinations, the supervisor relies to a large extent on the work by internal auditors and the information provided by the external auditors appointed by FI.
Principle 16.	On-Site and Off-Site Supervision An effective banking supervisory system should consist of some form of both on-site and off-site supervision.
Description	Supervision is performed as a combination of off-site supervision and on-site supervision. There are also various supervisory approaches ranging from specialized risk analysis to general supervisory activities. By on-site supervision, supervisors verify that internal control systems are in place, risk management methods are sufficient, etc. FI has issued guidance in various areas, which is followed up by on-site supervision. To support supervisors in their examinations and enhance quality, handbooks have been issued on credit risk, market risk, liquidity risk, internal controls, and operational risk. FI appoints auditors to banks who are required to report on compliance in key risk areas, i.e.,. on major deviations from FI’s regulations and guidelines. Internal control systems are to be a key subject for the auditors appointed by FI, especially how the reporting systems safeguard the supervisor receiving accurate information and in compliance with laws and regulations (Chapter 7 Section 5 the Banking Business Act). Prudential reports and statistical returns are analyzed on a regular basis (quarterly, semi-annually months and annually). Reported data from all financial institutions is fed into a specific database (Värdetatabasen). There are internal routines for ensuring that supervisors’ and risk analysts’ attention is drawn to deviations in data regarding capital adequacy (also to down-going trends) and large exposures. This information will then be subject to further risk analysis and examination. In addition to the general analysis of prudential reports, risk analysts have access to the database (Värdetatabasen), where the relevant background analysis data can be found. The database is a base for in-depth risk analyzes on various risk areas. Risk analysts also carry out on-site examinations in order to obtain other necessary information for the analysis. The overall supervisory principles and interaction between the main processes (supervision, financial stability analysis, and regulating and licensing) have been described in an internal paper by FI of March 2000 titled “The New Financial Supervision” (Den nya tillsynen). A detailed description of the supervision process has been made in the document “The Supervision Process” (Tillsynsprocessen) dated in February 2001. The supervision process depends on input from the other main processes. The horizontal cooperation between the main organizational departments (banking, insurance and capital markets) is to be enhanced by the contribution of “group managers” (koncernansvariga) who are responsible for making a risk assessment of the major systemically important groups or entities. The inspections and off-site analyzes of banks are done with the participation of specialists from the different sectional departments and the functional entities within them (risk analysis, legal issues and supervision), as well as from the recently established department for strategy and analysis. The department for strategy and analysis is responsible analyzing the prudential reports from all of the supervised entities, as well as for producing statistical information and, inter alia, for drafting the yearly financial stability report of FI. The group wide risk assessment (riskbedömning) has been defined as the core product of the supervisory process. The assessment is to embrace, inter alia, stress testing, risk diversification, pricing of risk, ownership structure, corporate governance, and capital adequacy. The content and methods of the assessment are yet to be defined in a systematic way. The process will be implemented in the final form in the year 2002. Each of the 13 groups or entities with systemic importance are to be evaluated on a yearly basis. One of the large commercial banks will subject to the first assessment of the prototype of the new model. The supervisory entity within the credit market department is responsible for planning the supervisory process for each banking group. There are three categories of supervisors: general analysts, who analyze prudential reports regularly; specialized risk analysts, who do in-depth analyzes in various risk areas as well as on-site examinations and general supervisors for respective financial sector, whose main task is to carry out on-site examinations. The annual supervision plan is updated every four months. Input to the review comes from a general directive document by the Director General, from results from analyzes, from previous supervision documents, etc. The mix of on-site and off-site supervision may differ between financial groups and companies. The total number of financial institutions and companies subject to supervision amounts to more than 2000. Among them are a number of medium size and small institutions such as savings banks, insurance brokers, small securities firms and very small local insurance companies and others. The frequency of onsite examination is higher with regard to large financial groups and companies. Small companies depend on off-site analyzes to a much higher degree. Sometimes, individual occurrences may give reason for on-site examinations also in small companies. Each such occurrence is, however, evaluated from a risk- and essentiality aspect, in order to determine if an examination should be prioritized. An external consulting agency has been hired to perform quality control on the effectiveness of the risk assessment process. Handbooks on supervisory routines for examiners have been drafted on different subject areas, and the supervisory “products” as defined above have been given definitions. A specified process leader has to make random tests, e.g., of inspection reports to check verify compliance with written procedures. Deviations from internal rules are reported to the owner of the supervision process (chief of department for strategy and analysis). External auditors of the Swedish National Audit Office also make checks on how the supervisor has been able to fulfill its objectives. FI’s supervisors are entitled to get any documentation from the supervised entity, including reports from internal and external auditors. FI appoints auditors in banks in addition to the auditors appointed at banks’ general meetings. The auditors are subject to specific reporting requirements to FI. The risk analysis units at FI specialize on assessing risks in various areas, e.g., credit risk, market risk, liquidity risk and operational risk. The supervisory approach to risk is to look at control environment and routines, risk management, risk measurement (costs for controlling risks, costs for failures, etc.), risk modeling, and pricing and capital allocation to risk. The basic principle in public administration is that documents and information are publicly available. There are, however, secrecy laws, which strictly protects certain information e.g., business relations or information that could damage the company if it was made public. FI has in its guidance (FFFS 1999:12) stated what should be required of internal audit functions regarding independence, competence, and reporting procedures. It is part of the supervisory process to assess compliance with this requirement. Supervisors usually meet with the internal auditors when carrying out on-site inspections.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	FI has a supervision process with defined procedures and responsibilities with on-site and off-site supervision. Due to the newness of the supervision process, some parts of the model for group wide risk assessment have not yet been fully tested. The model is projected to be implemented during 2002.
Principle 17.	Bank Management Contact Banking supervisors must have regular contact with bank management and a thorough understanding of the institution’s operations.
Description	The management of FI has regular meetings, on a quarterly basis, with senior management from the four biggest banks in Sweden. There are also yearly meetings where the annual accounts and other specific issues are discussed with the four banks as well as with some of the other banks. The boards and the management of Swedish banks have a tradition of informally notifying FI whenever changes, structural, strategic etc, are about to take place. The Banking Business Act and the Financing Operations Act require a bank to notify, and in some circumstances also apply for new permit concerning their business activities, e.g., major acquisitions, as well changes in ownership. According to FI guideline (1999:7) incidents that are of major importance to the bank must be reported to FI. This includes crimes against the bank and deliberate as well unintentional mistakes connected to banking activities. Essential economic losses must be connected to such incidents; they must pose a threat to the bank’s vital functions, incidents can or may have lead to serious disruptions, recurring or long cuts in the bank’s services, communications or IT activities; there may be a risk that the bank’s integrity is jeopardized, or several customers or employees are affected. There is a specific general guideline concerning Assessment of Owner/Management (FFFS 1998:14). The persons who are examined are new board members, deputy board members, managing directors and deputy managing directors. The controls consists of management level of education, other education of importance to the position, previous employment during the last ten years, if the person has been sentenced in court and if the person is subject to a preliminary investigation, if the person holds a qualifying amount of shares in the company and if the person has been assessed earlier. FI carries out the assessment by contacting the police and executor authority, checking the register of companies as well as the registration of insiders. If a person is found unfit for the position, FI contacts the bank; however the supervisor has no binding powers to force a resignation of management.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	None
Principle 18.	Off-Site Supervision Banking supervisors must have a means of collecting, reviewing, and analyzing prudential reports and statistical returns from banks on a solo and consolidated basis.
Description	Banks and credit institutions subject to the supervision by FI are required to submit information on their financial condition and performance, at regular intervals. These reports are with the relevant FI regulation or guideline: – Standard report (every 3rd month), information about the balance sheet and the income statement. Further, see below. (FFFS 2000:23) – Large exposures (every 6th month) (FFFS 2000:6) – Solvency ratio and capital adequacy (every 3rd month) (FFFS 2000:6) – Interest rate risk exposure (every 3rd month) (FFFS 1998:11) – Qualified owners and subsidiaries (yearly), (FFFS 2000:7) – Possession of investment shares (yearly), (FFFS 2000:6) – Derivative statistics (every 6th month), (FFFS 1998:7) The reports are, with a few exceptions, submitted on both a solo and consolidated basis. Financial companies in Sweden have to comply with the accounting regulations in the Annual Accounts Act for Credit Institutions and Securities Companies (“ÅRKL,” 1995:1559). The Act is partly an implementation of the Bank Accounting Directive (BAD), 86/635/EEG. ÅRKL, refers to a great extent (mainly related to accounting issues not specific for financial institutions) to paragraphs in the Annual Accounts Act, (1995:1554, “ÅRL”). ÅRL applies to general companies, and is the result of the Swedish implementation of the fourth and 7th EC Company directives on annual accounts and consolidated accounts. According to Chapter 1, Section 5 of ÅRKL, FI has the right to issue binding regulations in the accounting area. FI has issued such regulations and general guidelines as follows: regulations that implement certain parts of the BAD (Bank Accounting Directive), clarifications of ÅRKL (Regulation FFFS 2000:18), and more detailed accounting regulation on accounting for financial instruments (Regulation FFFS 2000:18). The accounting laws provide the legal framework and the more detailed regulation is provided by the binding regulations issued by FI. In the annual financial statements, credit institutions and securities companies have to state whether they comply with the regulations issued by FI. Any deviation must be disclosed and could render a qualified opinion by the auditor. The above-mentioned reports on financial condition and performance are delivered at regular intervals, though with different frequency. The reports must be delivered at a settled date, usually a month after the reporting period. Late reporting, miss reporting, etc, can in serious cases result in the imposition of sanctions, for example withdrawal of a permit, the issue of a warning or a fine according to the Banking Business Act. The sanctions in the Act can be used for misreporting and persistent errors in all kind of reporting, for example reporting connected with the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act. In April 2000 FI issued a warning to a credit institution, which among other things had sent in reports too late at several occasions. Another company was punished in February 2000 by withdrawal of permit, among other things due to its miss reporting. The information submitted includes standardized prudential and statistical reports. The above-mentioned Standard Report consists of a detailed balance sheet and income statement. Specifications in the Standard Report include for instance details concerning on and off-balance sheet activities, problem loans, credit losses, provisioning and details on shareholders’ equity. FI cooperates with Statistics Sweden and Riksbanken regarding financial statistics (guidelines FFFS 1998:19 and FFFS 1999:3). Beyond the reporting of financial condition and performance, on the basis of Chapter 1 Section 11 the Banking Business Act, FI can request information on any other part of a bank group’s activities. However, on the basis of a special situation a company can be granted an exemption from the reporting requirements. The statistical and prudential information reported is taken care of at the Statistical Department. FI has an analytical framework that uses reported information for the ongoing monitoring of the condition and performance of individual banks. The information and analyzes are then spread throughout the whole organization and used for various activities, for example on-site supervision. The information reported is stored in a database. From the database the different departments search for, or order the information they use in their daily work. The database was created in the beginning of the nineties and it is therefore possible to make comparable time series for almost ten years, with a frequency up to three months. Data is collected on a comparable basis and related to the same dates and periods in order to make meaningful comparisons between banking organizations. The dates and periods of the information in the database are commensurate with normal accounting periods: – Dates (stock data): end March, June, September and/or December – Periods (flow data): January to March, January to June, January to September and/or January to December.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	There is no standardized prudential report regarding a credit institution’s liquidity situation; one is scheduled to come in place during 2002.
Principle 19.	Validation of Supervisory Information Banking supervisors must have a means of independent validation of supervisory information either through on-site examinations or use of external auditors.
Description	By on-site supervision, FI endeavors to form a coherent picture of an institution’s risk position. Supervisors verify that internal control systems are in place, risk management methods are sufficient and that laws and regulations are complied with. To support supervisors in their examinations and enhance quality, handbooks have been issued different risk areas. On-site supervision is performed according to a yearly plan that is updated three times a year. An examination must be concluded with a written supervision report. The report must include e.g., a description of shortcomings detected and a remark or admonition to rectify the situation. On-site examinations at the large banks generally require the contribution of three inspectors for three days each. The total time spent on an individual inspection is two to three months. FI performs inspections of the major risk areas in the larger banks with a frequency of every three years. The most important foreign branches of the major banks are visited with a frequency of every four years. The supervisory process regularly involves meetings with auditors in the preparation of on-site examinations. FI has no system of systematically obtaining the reports of a bank’s internal and external auditors. The reports of the internal audit are only requested in connection with FI’s projected examinations. FI appoints auditors to banks who are obliged to report on compliance in key risk areas, i.e., on major deviations from FI’s regulations and guidelines. Internal control systems are a key subject for the auditors appointed by FI, especially how the reporting systems safeguard the supervisor receiving accurate information and in compliance with laws and regulations (Chapter 7 Section 5 the Banking Business Act). On the basis of Chapter 7 Section 5 the Banking Business Act, FI appoints an auditor in a bank in addition to those appointed at the general meeting or shareholders’ meeting. FI’s policy is not to appoint an auditor from a accountant firm from which an auditor has been elected by the general meeting of the bank. The auditor appointed by FI may not without FI’s consent provide consulting services to the bank or an entity closely linked with it. The law requires that at least one of the auditors must be a chartered accountant. FI has the authority to appoint auditors to do specific reviews on its behalf. The Board of Directors of a savings bank or members bank shall immediately notify FI if the auditor does not have the needed qualifications or knowledge or e.g., who is in bankruptcy. In the case of a commercial bank, the case would be referred to a County Administrative Court according to the Companies Act. The quality of the external audit is regularly a part of the examination process by FI. The supervisor has the legal right of full access to all bank records as well as to the board, senior management and staff. According to Chapter 7 Section 6 the Banking Business Act, FI may whenever necessary convene a meeting of the board or an extra general meeting of the bank. Representatives of FI may take part in the deliberations. Periodic examination of auditors’ returns is part of the supervisory work. Auditors appointed by FI have a requirement to report on compliance in key risk areas, i.e., on major deviations from FI’s regulations and guidelines. Internal control systems are to be a key subject for the auditors appointed by FI, especially how the reporting systems safeguard the supervisor receiving accurate information and in compliance with laws and regulations (Section 4, FFFS 1998:5). FI meets at least once a year with management of main banks and financial groups.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	In its regulations FI has increasingly laid stress on the proper arrangements of banks’ internal audit function. The supervisor has connections with external auditors representing the shareowners only through the auditor FI appoints.
Principle 20.	Consolidated Supervision An essential element of banking supervision is the ability of the supervisors to supervise the banking group on a consolidated basis.
Description	FI has entered into MOU with supervisory authorities in most of the countries where Swedish bank groups have subsidiaries. Information on a subsidiary could be achieved directly from the foreign authority concerned. In most cases it is possible for FI to participate in an on-site investigation made by the foreign authority. According to FI‘s regulation FFFS 2000:7, a bank must make a yearly report listing the subsidiaries and other ownership interests as well as branches and representative offices. According to the Banking Business Act Chapter 1 Section 11, if a bank is part of a group, the provisions of the Act and the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act regarding the bank’s business and supervision of the bank shall apply, where applicable, to other companies within the group, including non-financial companies. The limitations imposed on the bank’s business shall also relate to the same companies jointly. Other entities belonging to the group shall provide FI with any information regarding their operations and relevant circumstances which FI requires in order to exercise its supervision of the bank. - Group contributions may only be given by the bank following the consent of FI. According to the Banking Business Act Chapter 7 Section 1, a bank is subject to the supervision of FI and must be registered with FI. The bank must furnish FI with any information regarding its operations and circumstances connected therewith requested by FI. FI may carry out investigations at the bank at any time it considers necessary. If a Swedish bank has taken a decision which is in contravention of the Act or any other legislation which regulates the bank’s operations, or against a regulation issued by virtue of such legislation or against the bank’s articles of association, FI may enjoin the execution of the decision. If possible, FI may order the bank to rescind the decision if it has already been executed. FI is in the process of developing a new model for risk assessment of the financial institutes under supervision based on three parts: key financial ratios based on information from the institutes; market ratios for the public institutes; and risk analysis and evaluation of risk management and controls based on FI’s own findings through examinations. It is FI’s goal to perform the full risk assessment on thirteen institutes or groups of institutes that FI has identified as systemically critical. FI is currently in the process of developing a new approach to the financial strength and risk exposure of supervised institutes. The supervision of bank groups on a consolidated basis is of the highest priority for FI. FI is responsible for the regulations concerning accounting standards for credit institutes and financial conglomerates/financial groups. Accounting regulations apply to both solo level and consolidated groups. In the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act Chapter 6 there is a definition for a financial group. The group includes a credit institution, a securities firm or a financial holding company with subsidiaries that are either credit institutions, securities firms or “financial institutions” (holding companies, securities firms without licenses or currency traders). According to the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposure Act, the prudential rules contained in the law are applied both on a solo level for credit institutions (and securities firms) and on a consolidated basis concerning the financial group. Also companies that provide data services or manage real estate are included in the financial group. FI collects a number of reports regarding parent companies, Swedish subsidiaries, foreign branches and consolidated reports for groups with a bank or a holding company at the top. The reports cover data, e.g., on the balance sheet and the profit and loss accounts, on large exposures and capital adequacy ratios regarding credit and market risks (FFFS regulation 2000:6). Collection of data and analyzes are done both on solo and consolidated basis. The reporting requirements are applied to all institutions on a uniform basis. FI does not have powers to circumscribe the range of activities a bank is entitled to engage in on the basis of the bank’s risk position, inter alia explicit powers to order a foreign branch to be shut down. A bank does need FI’s authorization for acquiring a subsidiary, i.e., a bank’s business. FI does not accord sufficient attention to the issue of efficient host country supervision when processing applications for foreign establishments by local banks. (cf. CP 23). If a bank is part of a group, the legal provisions regarding the bank’s business and supervision of the bank also apply to other undertakings within the group. The limitations imposed on the bank’s business shall relate to the undertakings jointly. Other entities belonging to the group shall provide FI with any information regarding their operations that FI requires in order to exercise its supervision of the bank. If a bank has made a decision in contravention of a banking act, FI may enjoin the execution of the decision. The fit and proper tests of the owners of banks are carried out according to FI’s regulations on the basis of Chapter 7 Section 13 a the Banking Business Act.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	The laws apply to prudential regulation on a consolidated basis; the regulations give the supervisor powers to give prudential rules on a consolidated basis. FI does not, however, have powers to circumscribe the range of activities a bank can engage in, e.g., through its subsidiaries. When assessing an application for a foreign establishment by a Swedish bank FI is not required by law to assess the supervisory arrangements in the host country in order to safeguard efficient supervision on a consolidated basis. In view of the expanding overseas activities of Swedish banks, FI ought to enhance the assessment of the safety and soundness of the banks’ foreign operations. The authority has yet to conclude agreements with some of the countries outside the EU where Swedish banks have established operations. In the case of complex multinational banking groups FI is in the process of defining its role as the lead supervisor.
Principle 21.	Accounting Standards Banking supervisors must be satisfied that each bank maintains adequate records drawn up in accordance with consistent accounting policies and practices that enable the supervisor to obtain a true and fair view of the financial condition of the bank and the profitability of its business, and that the bank publishes on a regular basis financial statements that fairly reflect its condition.
Description	The general guideline concerning control, internal information and internal controls by FI (FFFS 1999:12) determines that it is the board of the institution which is responsible that there be reliable procedures and information systems within the institution in order to maintain internal control but also in order to analyze and evaluate risks. The regulations and general guideline concerning the annual reports of banks (FFFS 2000:18) determine what is required concerning financial record keeping system and the data they should produce, to the public as well as to FI. Should an institution have failed to publish an annual report or/and the annual report has not been audited properly FI would be in a position to revoke the license. The annual report has to be audited as prescribed in law. According to the Annual accounts Act and the Swedish Companies Act it constitutes a crime not to publish an audited annual report. If the bank does not deliver an annual and audited report within eleven months since the ending of the financial year the bank will be compulsorily liquidated. The auditors’ tasks are defined in the Swedish Companies Act Chapter 10 sections 3-6. The auditor examines the annual report and the accounting records as well as the administration of the Board of Directors and the managing director. The audit report attached to the annual accounts must be signed by all auditors, including the one appointed by FI. The auditors appointed by the general meeting of the shareholders and the auditor appointed by FI are responsible for the examination of the accounting records. The auditor appointed by FI files a report according to the general guideline FFFS 1998:5. The auditor has to make a report within three weeks of completing the auditing of the annual accounts. Among others it must include notes on major shortcomings in the bank’s internal control systems, accounting and administration, as well as an account of on discrepancies from FI’s regulations and guidelines. FI has issued regulation concerning the annual reports of banks (FFFS 2000:18). Banks also have to follow the Annual accounts Act of credit institutions and securities companies where are implemented the EU’s Bank Accounts Directive. Banks are bound to follow the above and to follow other laws and applying recommendations and statements on accounting matters from other standard setters where appropriate. Banks are required to utilize valuations rules that are consistent, realistic and prudent, taking account of current values where relevant, and that profits are net of appropriate provisions. The Swedish Companies Act and the Annual accounts Act of credit institutions and securities companies as well as the regulations concerning annual reports of banks (FFFS 2000:18), inclusive minimum standards of public disclosure requirements, as well as FI’s guideline 1998:5 for auditors appointed by FI, provide the general framework. But also the recommendations from the Swedish Institute of Authorized Public Accountants (FAR) determine generally accepted auditing standards. The auditors’ reports are not subjected to FI’s approval prior to publishing. In the Secrecy Act, there are provisions on what type of information is to be treated as confidential and to which authorities and other bodies such information can be divulged to. Swedish banks have to produce annual audited financial statements according to the Annual accounts Act of credit institutions and securities companies. The Swedish Companies Act requires that the auditor examine the company’s annual report and the accounting records as well as the administration of the Board of Directors and the managing director. The examination should be performed in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards. The Swedish Institute of Authorized Public Accountants determines generally accepted auditing standards. The standards comply substantially with internationally accepted auditing standards. FI is required by law (Chapter 7 Section 5 Banking Business Act) to appoint additional auditors to perform the same examination as the auditors appointed by the general meeting of the shareholders. Auditors appointed by FI examine issues according to instructions from the supervisory authority. The auditor appointed by FI may not represent the same auditing firm as the auditor appointed by the bank’s general meeting. Furthermore banks are to follow the Bookkeeping Act that contains regulations on bookkeeping and retaining of accounting records. The banks should follow the recommendations issued by the Swedish Accounting Standards Board (Bokföringsnämnden), which was founded to interpret the Bookkeeping Act as well as generally accepted accounting principles as stipulated by the Act. Where appropriate, banks should also apply the recommendations and statements on accounting matters from the Swedish Financial Accounting Standards Council (Redovisningsrådet), which is the body in Sweden assigned to implement the accounting standards issued by the International Accounting Standards Council, IASC. The work is under progress and so far about 20 recommendations have been issued. FI has no powers to revoke the auditors appointed by the general meeting of shareholders. FI can instead revoke the appointment of the auditor referred in Chapter 7 Section 5 the Banking Business Act. FI conducts its supervision both with its own examination staff as well as external auditors, including the one appointed by it according to the Banking Business Act. Banks have to produce interim statements at least once a year according to the Annual Accounts Act of credit institutions and securities companies. The law states also the minimum requirements of what the interim statement should include and when the interim statements should be issued. FI’s regulations and general guidelines (FFFS 2000:18) provide further details on fundamental regulations, rules on valuation and disclosures to be applied when preparing the interim statement. The banks that are listed on the stock exchange are to prepare interim statements quarterly. The auditor has to report immediately to FI if he becomes aware of circumstances which may constitute a significant breach of the legislation which regulates the operations of banks; may have a negative effect upon the bank’s future operations; or may lead to the auditor advising against the adoption of the balance sheet or profit and loss account or to qualification in accordance with the Companies Act. The auditor must similarly report to FI of any of his findings that concern the bank’s parent undertaking or subsidiaries, or an undertaking which has a similar relation to the bank. The reporting requirements of the auditor appointed by FI are stipulated in FI`s guideline (FFFS 1998:5). FI has also issued a general guideline concerning reporting of significant events (FFFS 1999:7) according to which the management of the bank has to file a report to the supervisor within a period of four weeks. The guideline 1998:5 states also that the auditor appointed by FI shall on a continuous basis report to FI on such findings that may be of significance to FI for its supervisory purposes. The auditor must also report to FI of any written complaint addressed to the board of a bank.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	The supervisor has no powers to revoke the appointment of an auditor elected by the shareholders’ meeting. FI shall appoint (and discharge) a special auditor whose functions are partly dictated by FI’s guidelines and who must furnish special reports to FI.
Principle 22.	Remedial Measures Banking supervisors must have at their disposal adequate supervisory measures to bring about timely corrective action when banks fail to meet prudential requirements (such as minimum capital adequacy ratios), when there are regulatory violations, or where depositors are threatened in any other way. In extreme circumstances, this should include the ability to revoke the banking license or recommend its revocation.
Description	According to Chapter 7 (passage titled “Intervention against banks”) of the Banking Business Act FI has the authority to take remedial action against banks. Where a Swedish bank has taken a decision which is in contravention of this Act or any other legislation which regulates the bank’s operations, or against a regulation issued by virtue of such legislation or against the bank’s articles of association, FI may enjoin the execution of the decision. Where the decision has already been executed, the supervisory authority may order the bank to rescind the decision, where possible. A Swedish bank’s charter shall be revoked in the following circumstances. In the cases below marked 4 and 5, a warning may be issued instead of revocation if that is deemed to be sufficient. 1. the bank has not submitted an application for registration within the prescribed period or the application has been withdrawn or cancelled as a result of a decision which has become final; 2. the bank has not commenced banking operations within one year after the grant of the charter or the bank, prior thereto, has declared that it will not be utilizing the charter; 3. the bank has transferred its entire business; 4. the bank has not conducted banking operations during a continuous period of six months; 5. the bank, as a result of the breach of a provision referred to in Section 15 or in any other manner, has proved itself to be unsuitable to exercise such operations to which the charter relates; 6. the commercial bank’s capital base is less than five million euro and the deficiency has not been covered within three months from the discovery of the deficiency by the bank (similar requirements are set forth in the acts regulating savings banks, and member banks; 7. the bank has failed to fulfill its obligations in accordance with the Deposit Guarantees Act and has not undertaken rectification within one year from such time as FI ordered the bank to comply with its obligations with a warning that the bank’s charter may be revoked; or 8. any person who is a member of the commercial bank’s Board of Directors, or its managing director, or the acting managing director does not possess sufficient insight and experience in order to participate in the management of a bank and is otherwise not suitable for such a task. The commercial bank’s charter shall also be revoked where it may be assumed that any such person has failed, to a significant extent, to comply with his obligations in commercial operations or in other financial affairs or has been convicted of serious criminal offences (similar requirements are set forth in the acts regulating savings banks and member banks). Revocation of charters and the issuance of warnings are decided upon by FI. The government shall determine cases of exceptional importance. FI’s Director General has the discretion to refer a case for governmental decision making. Where a special cause exists, FI may grant an extension to cover the deficiency in the bank’s capital base. In the cases where e.g., the managing director has been found unsuitable for his position, the charter may only be revoked where FI has taken a decision to complain about the person and that he or she, following a specified period determined by FI, remains in the position. Where the charter is revoked, the governmental authority, which decided to revoke the charter, may determine the manner in which the winding up of the business shall take place. An injunction against future operations may be ordered together with a decision in respect of revocation. Where FI is informed by a competent governmental authority in another country within the EEA of the fact that a Swedish bank has violated the laws of that country, the measures of injunction and warning may be taken against the bank. FI shall inform the competent governmental authority in the other country of the measures undertaken. When a banking undertaking which is domiciled in a country outside the EEA conducts banking operations from branch offices in Sweden and, in such context, breaches a provision as referred to in Section 15 the Banking Business Act or in any other manner proves itself to be unsuitable to conduct banking operations, the branch office’s license shall be revoked or a warning shall be issued if such is deemed to be sufficient. Issues regarding revocation of branch office licenses and the issuance of warnings shall be determined by FI. The government shall determine cases of principle or of exceptional importance. Where deposits at the branch office are covered by a guarantee as a result of a decision in accordance with the Deposit Guarantees Act, FI may, in the event that the bank fails to fulfill its obligations in accordance with the Deposit Guarantees Act, order the bank to undertake rectification with a warning that the branch office’s license will otherwise be revoked. The license may be revoked in the event that rectification has not been undertaken within one year from the date of the order. FI shall inform the supervisory authority in the country where the banking undertaking has its registered head office of the measures undertaken. If a bank domiciled in a country within the EEA conducts operations in Sweden through a branch or by direct provision of services and breaches a legal provision or in any other manner proves itself to be unsuitable to conduct such operations, FI may order the bank to effect rectification. Where the bank fails to comply with the order, FI shall inform the competent governmental authority in the bank’s home country. Where rectification is not effected notwithstanding FI’s order, FI may enjoin the foreign bank from assuming further obligations in Sweden. Prior to the issuance of the injunction, FI shall inform the home country supervisor. In urgent cases, FI may issue the injunction without prior notification to the home country authority. If the operating license of a bank domiciled in another country within the EEA conducts operations in Sweden has been revoked in its home country, FI shall immediately enjoin the bank from entering into further obligations in Sweden. According to Section 23 the Banking Business Act, FI may issue orders or injunctions in accordance with the provisions in the Act on pain of a conditional fine. FI has also the authority to take remedial actions against banks with the support of Chapter 7 of the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act [lag om kapitaltäckning och stora exponeringar för kreditinstitut och värdepappersbolag]. If a bank or a financial group of undertakings: 1. has a capital base which is less than the minimum amount required pursuant to Chapter 2, (8 percent); 2. fails to fulfill the requirements with respect to systems and routines related to registration and classification of credit risks, supervision and verification of market risks and large exposures and interest risks in its operations in their entirety; and calculation of the institution’s or the financial group’s financial positions; and 3. fails to reduce its large exposures to the permitted levels. FI shall order the institution or the undertaking in a financial group of undertakings which must prepare the group-based accounting to take appropriate measures in order to rectify the situation. According to Chapter 7 Section 15, the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act, when FI issues injunctions pursuant to this Act, it may also make such orders subject to conditional fines. The supervisor can not impose penalties for non-compliance, it can only set conditional fines. The supervisor can not restrict or suspend payments to shareholders or share-repurchases, make decisions barring individuals from banking or replace managers, directors or controlling owners or restrict their powers. No arrangements for a take-over by or a merger with a healthier institution can be imposed on a bank. Nor is it possible to impose conservatorship on an ailing bank. FI cannot either impose restrictions on the current activities of the bank or on asset transfers from the bank. The supervisor cannot apply penalties and sanctions to the management and/or the Board of Directors of the bank. There are no laws or regulations that mitigate against the supervisor delaying appropriate corrective actions. However, criminal law concerning civil servants can be said to oblige the supervisor to act promptly when there is a clear need of corrective action. Failure to do so can render responsibility under Chapter 20 Section 1 of the Penal Code for breach of duty or under Section 14 of the Act on Employment in the Public Sector for professional misconduct.
Assessment	MATERIALLY NON-Compliant
Comments	The supervisor has a limited range of remedial actions available; in addition to issuing warnings and imposing conditional fines, the supervisor can revoke the license. However, the supervisor should be able to take a more proactive approach with respect to remedial measures. The Committee on Banking Law has in 1998 proposed some amendments and additions to the powers of FI in order to broaden the range of remedial actions. The proposals include inter alia a possibility to communicate formal complaints (erinran) and to broaden the scope of issuing warnings. The supervisor is not empowered to take most of the measures enumerated in the essential criteria, e.g., restricting the scope of activities of a bank and suspending the payment of dividends. There are no laws or regulations that would militate against supervisory forbearance.
Principle 23.	Globally Consolidated Supervision Banking supervisors must practice global consolidated supervision over their internationally active banking organizations, adequately monitoring and applying appropriate prudential norms to all aspects of the business conducted by these banking organizations worldwide, primarily at their foreign branches, joint ventures, and subsidiaries.
Description	According to the Banking Business Act, a bank must furnish FI with any information regarding its operations and circumstances connected therewith requested by FI. FI may carry out investigations at the bank at such times as the supervisory authority considers necessary. Rules governing financial groups are to be found in Chapter 6 and 7 of the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act and in Chapter 14 of the Regulations and general guidelines issued by FI concerning capital adequacy and large exposures, FFFS 2000:6. According Chapter 7 Section 2, FI shall exercise supervision over a financial group of undertakings where the parent undertaking, or an undertaking in the group which holds an ownership interest, is an institution domiciled in Sweden. Where the parent undertaking in a financial group of undertakings is a holding company with financial operations, FI shall exercise supervision where (1) there are no foreign undertakings equivalent to institutions in the group of undertakings, or (2) the holding undertaking is domiciled in Sweden and at least one subsidiary undertaking is an institution. FI shall, within the scope of its authority, upon request from the competent authority in another country within the EEA, submit or verify information necessary in order for the foreign authority to exercise its supervision or also permit such authority to perform the verification itself. To the extent prescribed in the act or relevant regulations, a financial group of undertakings shall submit information in a special report covering the group’s total financial position (group-based accounting). An undertaking included in a financial group of undertakings and other subsidiary undertakings of an institution or a holding undertaking with financial operations, and subsidiary undertakings to a holding undertaking with diversified operations, shall submit information which is required by the undertaking responsible for preparing the reports on group-based accounting or total information. FI may grant an exclusion to a subsidiary or an undertaking with an ownership interest from the obligation to submit a supervisory report where 1) the undertaking is located in a country outside the EEA where there exist legal impediments to the transfer of necessary information; (2) the undertaking is of minor significance in relation to the purpose of the supervision; or (3) a summary of the undertaking’s financial position would be inappropriate or misleading taking into consideration the purpose of the supervision. Where a subsidiary undertaking which is an institution is exempt from supervisory reporting obligation the parent undertaking shall submit to FI any information necessary for FI to exercise its supervision over the institution. FI’s general guidelines on internal controls and risk management all apply to the foreign entities of Swedish banks. FI regularly collects consolidated reports and makes on-site examinations regarding locally incorporated banks and their foreign establishments. The focus of the on-site examinations has especially been how the foreign establishments control and follow up market risks in their business. On-site examinations at major banks’ head offices include examinations of the management’s responsibility and role concerning its engagement of the handling of market risks, such as risk- and results reporting, at the bank’s foreign establishments. In connection with on-site examinations at banks’ foreign establishments, emphasis is laid on how local management performs its control functions and monitors of e.g., market risks. An examination of the foreign establishment’s manager is also made with regard to how his job description conforms with his mandate. It is also investigated during on-site examinations if and to what extent the banks foreign establishments comply with laws and regulations (both internal and external as well as those of the home and host country). FI does not have the legal authority to require closing of overseas offices or imposing limitations on their activities. As a last resort, if the activities of the foreign establishments threaten the parent bank’s sound business operations, FI can issue a warning or in extreme circumstances revoke the bank’s license. On-site examinations at major banks’ head offices include examinations of the management’s responsibility and role concerning its engagement in the handling of market risks, including risk reporting and performance, at the bank’s foreign establishments. As the home country authority FI has the main supervisory responsibility for a foreign branch of a Swedish bank located in a country within the EEA. Considerations relating to essence and risk are the starting points for FI’s planning for operative supervision. On-site examinations at the major banks foreign establishments are conducted according to inspection programs laid down by FI. At the on-site examinations it is mandatory to visit the local supervisors before and/or after the examination. The local supervisors are informed about observations and assessments and there is also an exchange of information and discussions about current questions regarding supervision, regulation and practice. FI does not assess the quality of supervision conducted in the countries in which its banks have material operations in a systematic way. According to the Banking Business Act a bank may, pursuant to a license from FI establish a branch office in a country outside of the EEA. A license must be granted where the intended business may be assumed to fulfill the requirements of a sound banking operation. The application must include information about the country in which the branch office is to be established and the address of the branch office and the names of the responsible management.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	FI performs the supervision of banks on a global consolidated basis. The supervisor is not though empowered to prevent the establishment of branches in jurisdictions where the local supervisory arrangements are not adequate to the risks involved in the operations. FI has to take into consideration the preconditions of a sound banking operation. FI also lack powers to require the closing of overseas offices or limitations on their scope of activities.
Principle 24.	Host Country Supervision A key component of consolidated supervision is establishing contact and information exchange with the various other supervisors involved, primarily host country supervisory authorities.
Description	Within the EU Sweden has concluded MOU’s (memoranda of understanding) with all countries in which a Swedish bank is established and vice versa. A specific MOU concerning the supervision of the Nordea group has been concluded the supervisory authorities of Denmark, Finland, and Norway. On-site inspections have been carried out at a number of locations whether within or outside the EU. Outside the EU FI has, when necessary, established contacts and possibilities to exchange information to fulfill its consolidated supervision. There is a MOU concluded with Latvia. Efforts are being made to conclude MOU’s with the United States of America, Poland, Estonia, and Lithuania. The law does not specifically enable FI to prohibit a bank or its affiliates from establishing operations in countries where laws and regulations prohibit exchange of information necessary for supervisory purposes. Chapter 2 Section 5 the Banking Business Act, though provides that a bank may be authorized by FI to acquire another bank’s business, i.e., acquiring a subsidiary, only on the condition that the acquisition is not deemed to be prejudicial to the public interest. According to Chapter 7 Section 17 the Banking Business Act, when FI is informed by a competent governmental authority in another country within the EEA of the fact that a Swedish bank has violated the laws of that country, FI may enjoin the execution of the decision by the bank, or it can revoke the license or issue a warning. FI shall inform the competent governmental authority in the other country of the measures undertaken. According to the MOU on the supervision of Nordea, exchange of information between the supervisory authorities takes place on e.g., the following subject areas: the group’s financial standing, information on intra-group transactions, information on different risk areas, reports on matters of major importance produced by the authorities, reports on completed on-site inspections, circumstances affecting the markets in which the group operates, substantial changes in the activities of the Nordea group, changes in the group’s management or ownership structure, information collected and processed by the authorities, e.g., the critical assessments, and new legislation including regulations or equivalent provisions in the countries concerned.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	FI has entered into MOU’s with several foreign supervisory authorities. The authority has yet to conclude agreements with some of the countries outside the EEA where Swedish banks have established operations. Referring to the public interest, FI can on the basis of the Banking Business Act deny authorization for the acquisition of a foreign banking firm but it cannot deny a license for a branch outside the EEA on the grounds that the free flow of supervisory information is hindered by local laws or regulations.
Principle 25.	Supervision Over Foreign Banks’ Establishments Banking supervisors must require the local operations of foreign banks to be conducted with the same high standards as are required of domestic institutions and must have powers to share information needed by the home country supervisors of those banks for the purpose of carrying out consolidated supervision.
Description	Rules governing local operations of foreign banks are in the Banking Business Act. According to Chapter 1 Section 4, a foreign banking undertaking may conduct banking business via branch offices having been granted a license to do so; or following notification to FI, conduct operations which primarily relate to representation and brokering of banking services from offices or other permanent establishments (representative offices). A license for the establishment of a branch office in issued by FI. The government shall determine cases involving matters of crucial importance or of exceptional significance. A license for the establishment of a branch office shall be granted where: 1. the planned business may be assumed to fulfill the requirements of a sound banking operation; and 2. deposits with the branch office are covered by the guarantee in accordance with the Deposit Guarantees Act, or by a foreign guarantee which covers deposits as referred to in Section 2 of the Deposit Guarantees Act and which have a maximum compensation level of not less than an amount corresponding to 20,000 Euro prior to any deductions, where applicable, for excess in an amount not exceeding 10 percent of an individual depositor’s guaranteed deposit. A license may not be denied on the basis that no further banks are required. A license is not required for banking undertakings domiciled in a country within the EEA. Such undertakings may: 1. conduct banking business via branch offices in Sweden commencing two months following receipt of notification by FI from the home country authority; and 2. conduct banking operations by offering and providing services from its home country after FI receives notification from a competent governmental authority A foreign bank is permitted to engage in the activities enumerated in Chapter 2 Section 2 the Banking Business Act (see CP 2). A foreign banking undertaking may conduct operations referred to in Section 2 only to the extent such operations are covered by the bank’s license to conduct operations in the country in which the undertaking maintains its registered office. With special reference to provisions regarding supervision of branch offices of foreign banking undertakings domiciled within the EEA FI exercises supervision in cooperation with the competent governmental authority in the home country to ensure that the liquidity of the branch office established in Sweden is satisfactory. The branches of foreign banks must submit to FI a profit and loss account four times a year. Following notification to FI, a competent governmental authority in another country within the EEA may undertake investigations at a branch office established in Sweden of a banking undertaking domiciled in the other country. As to foreign banks domiciled within the EEA which conduct operations in via branch offices or through the direct provision of services, FI shall provide any information to the competent governmental authority in the bank’s home country which such authority requires for its supervisory purposes. FI may issue orders or injunctions in accordance on pain of a conditional fine for both local and foreign establishments. The same standards are applied. If a bank which is authorized in Sweden at the same time is a subsidiary to a foreign company with which it is consolidated in the home country FI needs to apply the rules on ownership control in an international context as well as needs to make an assessment whether the bank is an integral part of a financial group that is difficult to survey and hence is complicated to supervise. (Chapter 9 Section 3). If the home country supervisor practices consolidated supervision it is taken into consideration in the process. The law does not, however, require FI to determine that the home supervisor has given its approval for the establishment of a subsidiary in Sweden. FI can share information with a supervisory authority in another country according to Chapter 14 Section 2 the Secrecy Act. There are disclosure requirements contained in the MOU’s. Chapter 7 Section 9 of the Banking Business Act specifically allows FI to share information with a home country authority within the EEA. Following notification to FI, a competent governmental authority in another country within the EEA may undertake investigations at a branch set up in Sweden by a bank domiciled in the other country. Where a banking undertaking which is domiciled in a country outside the EEA conducts banking operations from a branch in Sweden and breaches a legal provision or in any other manner proves itself to be unsuitable to conduct banking operations, the branch office’s license shall be revoked or a warning shall be issued if such is deemed to be sufficient. Where deposits at the branch office are covered by a guarantee in accordance with the Deposit Guarantees Act, FI may, in the event that the banking undertaking fails to fulfill its obligations in accordance with the Deposit Guarantees Act, order the bank to undertake rectification with a warning that the branch office’s license will otherwise be revoked. The license may be revoked in the event that the banking undertaking has not undertaken the rectification within one year from the date of the order. FI shall inform the supervisory authority in the country where the banking undertaking has its registered office of the measures undertaken. When a bank domiciled in another country within the EEA conducts operations in Sweden via branch offices or through the direct provision of services and, in such context, breaches a legal provision or in any other manner proves itself to be unsuitable to conduct such operations, FI may order the bank to effect rectification. If the bank fails to comply with the order, FI shall inform the competent governmental authority in the undertaking’s home country. Where rectification is not effected, FI may enjoin the bank from assuming further obligations in Sweden. Prior to the issuance of the injunction, FI shall inform the competent governmental authority in the banking undertaking’s home country. If the operating license of a bank domiciled in another country within the EEA and conducting operations in Sweden via branch offices or through the direct provision of services has been revoked in its home country, FI shall immediately enjoin the banking undertaking from entering into further obligations in Sweden. FI as host country supervisor obtains information through the procedures established in MOU’s, as well as bilateral meetings and informal contacts. FI finds that the information obtained fulfills its requirements as to relevance and reliability.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	The local entities of foreign banks are supervised by FI in cooperation with the respective foreign authorities. The law does not state that the host supervisor needs to determine that approval (or no objection) from the home supervisor has been received for a foreign establishment. In the context of ownership control the FI does consult the foreign authority.

View Table

Table 1.

Detailed Assessment of Compliance of the Basel Core Principles

Principle 1.	Objectives, Autonomy, Powers, and Resources An effective system of banking supervision will have clear responsibilities and objectives for each agency involved in the supervision of banks. Each such agency should possess operational independence and adequate resources. A suitable legal framework for banking supervision is also necessary, including provisions relating to the authorization of banking establishments and their ongoing supervision; powers to address compliance with laws, as well as safety and soundness concerns; and legal protection for supervisors. Arrangements for sharing information between supervisors and protecting the confidentiality of such information should be in place.
Principle 1(1)	An effective system of banking supervision will have clear responsibilities and objectives for each agency involved in the supervision of banks.
Description	The main laws concerning banking are the Banking Business Act and the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposure Act which contain the main prudential rules and provide the basis for the powers of FI. Separate laws are in place for other deposit banks (savings banks and cooperative banks) as well as finance companies and mortgage institutions. A decree by the government has been given on FI whereby are set the main objectives of FI, i.e., promoting financial stability and efficiency and improving consumer protection. FI must, among other things, perform supervision according to what is stated in laws or decrees, monitor and analyze developments in the financial sector, issue regulations and guidelines and make contributions in international cooperation, and assist the government with comments on, for e.g., new laws and research projects. In addition, a general decree on government agencies is applicable to FI. The Board of FI consists of 10 members with the Director General of FI as chairman. The Director General and other board members are appointed by the government for a determinate period of time. The composition of the board is not defined in laws or decrees. Accordingly, in its choice of members the government is only bound by the tradition according to which the members include representatives from the parliament, the Central Bank, other authorities and the financial industry. The Board’s duties are to convene extra shareholders’ meetings, issuance permits and restrictions of essential nature as well as important regulations that are not delegated to the Director General. Urgent matters may be decided by exchange of information between the Director General and the number of board members needed for a quorum. FI is the only competent authority for the supervision of banks. According to Section 3 of the decree on FI, the supervisor has to consult with Riksbank, the Swedish Competition Authority, the Deposit Guarantee Board, on matters specified in the decree. The modes of cooperation and ways of exchanging information are established in the law governing the confidentiality of information and the status of government agencies. The Consumer Agency is the sole organization with which FI has entered into a formal memorandum of understanding. After the banking crisis of the early 90s, the institutional arrangements concerning the resolution of problem banks have been disbanded. FI would in a crisis situation participate on an ad hoc basis with other relevant authorities, especially Riksbanken and MOF. Agreement on whether and under which terms to create a new institutional framework for crisis situations has not been reached. The government (MoF) is responsible for bringing Swedish financial legislation in line with the relevant EU directives. As a member country Sweden is obligated to implement the directives into its national legislation with parliamentary laws. The government issues an annual directive (regleringsbrev) regarding the supervisor’s overall objectives with reporting stipulations on the fulfillment of the objectives. The directions are publicly available (on FI’s web site and elsewhere). In order to achieve the general objectives, FI sets its operational goals and objectives in its annual plan, which is also publicly available. The goals and objectives are subject to internal review every four months. The total performance of FI relating to the over-all objectives is accounted for in its annual report, which is subject to review by the Swedish National Audit Office. The Director General of FI appears approximately once a year to make a statement before the Parliamentary Finance Committee. The supervisory measures that FI takes as against the banks are made public by the supervisor, subject to rules of confidentiality. Each year, as a result of its financial stability analysis, FI publishes a report to the government relating to the stability of the system. FI publishes regularly in cooperation with Riksbanken and Statistics Sweden official statistics regarding performance in banks and securities firms. FI also issues a quarterly publication (Sparbarometern) on assets and liabilities in the household sector.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	The laws and regulations on banking activities and their supervision are in place. The composition of the Board of FI is not regulated in law or other ordinances. The position of FI in relation to other public agencies in possible crisis situations is not defined in law.
Principle 1(2)	Each such agency should possess operational independence and adequate resources.
Description	FI is an independent authority with its own board. FI makes its own budget requests within the framework of the total state budget, which is put before the parliament each year. An amount equivalent to the approved budget is charged by FI to the supervised institutions. Within its budget frames and the overall objectives, FI is independent in performing its regulatory and supervisory functions. FI’s main objectives are financial stability and the promotion of consumer protection. The government yearly issues FI’s general objectives after consulting with FI. FI’s reporting obligations as to each of the objectives are also stipulated. The Director General initiates the yearly consultations by issuing to the government a draft for FI’s objectives (inriktningsbrev). In order to achieve the overall objectives, FI sets its operational goals and objectives without having to consult with the government. FI has instituted a set of ethical standards for its employees concerning e.g., confidentiality, situations with conflicts of interest, loans from supervised entities, additional occupations, and dealings in financial instruments. For the new capital adequacy rules FI has requested a budget increase of SKR 30 million. An increase of SKR 8,2 million was granted to the budget for 2002. It is the goal of FI to increase its staff by 36 persons during 2002-03. The major risk areas the personnel increase would be assigned to would be credit risk and operational risk (14 persons). The operations are based on coordination of risk analysis in specific risk areas and general supervision. One of the main supervisory objectives is to produce on a group-wide risk assessments of the 13 major financial groups. FI can freely dispense with the appropriations according to its budget with its items for, inter alia, salaries, training of staff, equipment, travels, etc. Of the total budget of SKR 133 million for 2001, personnel outlays constitute SKR 91 million (including SKR 1,8 million for training and SKR 4,7 million for foreign travel and SKR 0,5 million for domestic travel). IT costs for soft and hardware acquisitions are SKR 2,9 million. The head of FI can be appointed by the government for the maximum of two terms of six years each. He can be removed from office in mid-term only for reasons specified in law. Where the head of a government agency is removed from office, the reasons must be publicly disclosed.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	FI has made a motion to the government for a large increase in the number of specialists in its employ. The supervisor cannot, however, with the present level of remuneration compete with the private sector. To improve its capacity to supervise particularly the more complex activities of banks, e.g., related to market risks, the supervisor has to be able to increase its competitiveness as an employer. The relatively large increase in personnel coincides with FI implementing the new model for risk assessment.
Principle 1(3)	A suitable legal framework for banking supervision is also necessary, including provisions relating to authorization of banking establishments and their ongoing supervision.
Description	The responsibilities of FI as to banking supervision are defined in the Banking Business Act, Chapter 7. FI has issued a regulation on the licensing process. According to the Banking Business Act, FI’s Director General can decide to pass on a licensing decision to the government in cases of great general importance. The government cannot unilaterally take on itself an individual licensing matter. A bank must furnish FI with any information regarding its operations and any relevant circumstances that FI requests. FI may carry out investigations at banks at such times as FI considers necessary. According to Chapter 7 Section 2 the Banking Business Act, the government or authorized by the government, FI may issue regulations regarding information which a bank shall provide to the supervisor; safekeeping and inventory of securities and financial instruments; and crime prevention measures at the bank. The Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act likewise confers the supervisor powers to give detailed provisions.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	None
Principle 1(4)	A suitable legal framework for banking supervision is also necessary, including powers to address compliance with laws, as well as safety and soundness concerns.
Description	According to the Banking Business Act, FI may decide to enjoin the execution of a decision where a bank has taken a decision which is in contravention of the laws which regulate the banks or against the bank’s articles of association. When the decision has already been executed, FI may order the bank to rescind the decision, where possible. FI has, according to the Banking Business Act, full access to any information from the bank that FI deems necessary. FI may carry out inspections at banks at such times, as FI considers necessary to review compliance with internal rules and external laws and regulations. FI has the possibility to take actions against a bank’s decision if it is in contravention of relevant law or against the bank’s articles of association. According to Chapter 7 Section 23 the Banking Business Act, FI may issue orders or injunctions on pain of a conditional fine. FI may also revoke the bank’s charter or issue warning to a bank under specific circumstances.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	According to the preliminary paper by the Banking Law Committee of 1998, the supervisor’s powers of remedial action should be increased.
Principle 1(5)	A suitable legal framework for banking supervision is also necessary, including legal protection for supervisors.
Description	While the legislation contains no provisions for legal protection concerning explicitly the FI and its employees, civil cases and cases regarding claims for damages must always be addressed to FI and not to the employee. The Law on Damage Compensation states that the employer has normally to bear the cost of compensation for damage caused by error or mistake by its employees (Chapter 3, Section 2). An employer may seek damages from the employee, but this would apply only in exceptional circumstances, after taking account of the nature of the action that caused damage, the position of the employee, the interests of the person who suffered damage and other relevant circumstances. Employees may be addressed directly in criminal cases. The employee may be judged responsible, if the case is not insignificant, for professional misconduct according to Chapter 20 Section 1 of the Penal Code. Employees may be sentenced to prison for up to two years, or in case of gross negligence or criminal intent, up to six years. The employee may also be judged responsible, if not an insignificant case, for disclosing secret information according to the Secrecy Act.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	The supervisory authority and its employees can be considered to have legal protection for their actions taken in good faith in their office.
Principle 1(6)	Arrangements for sharing information between supervisors and protecting the confidentiality of such information should be in place.
Description	According to the Ordinance for FI, FI shall confer with Riksbanken in matters regarding monetary stability or matters regarding monetary and payment policy. FI shall in these matters provide Riksbanken with necessary information. According to the agreement between FI and the Deposit Guarantee Board, FI will disclose information to the Deposit Guarantee Board so that it can fulfill its duties. For example, FI will on demand give information about deposits and capital ratio in order for the Deposit Guarantee Board to determine the fee for the deposit guarantee. Furthermore, the Deposit Guarantee Board will among other things be informed about new institutions that have been established, branches in Sweden of foreign institutions, and also branches abroad established by Swedish institutions. A bilateral cooperation agreement is not a precondition to exchange information with an authority of another country. FI may, on request, disclose information to an authority if the Swedish Secrecy Act does not hinder a disclosure. However, a bilateral agreement may in more detail regulate the exchange of information between the authorities and it may specify how information may be exchanged on a regular basis. FI has signed MOU’s with the EU-countries where the Swedish banks have operations, and FI has recently entered into an MOU with Latvia. FI has initiated discussions or made overtures with authorities of other countries on drafting of MOU’s, inter alia, with supervisors in Lithuania, Poland, Estonia and the USA. In the MOU with each foreign supervisor, cooperation and information sharing is treated as an essential issue. According to Chapter 8 Section 5 of the Secrecy Act, the government may decide that secrecy applies to information that FI has received according to an agreement with a foreign authority. If a reference to such an agreement between FI and a foreign supervisory authority is added to a list annexed to the Secrecy Ordinance, confidentiality will be preserved at FI concerning information received according to the agreement. The government has so far always decided that secrecy applies to information that FI has received according to memoranda of understanding, and the relevant agreements have always been added to Section 1 c of the Secrecy Ordinance. Under specific circumstances the Riksbank may ask for and receive secret supervisory information. FI is obliged to deny any demand for confidential information in its possession. The Swedish Secrecy Act regulates if and how FI, is bound by secrecy. According to the Secrecy Act, secrecy shall apply to such activities of FI, which consist of the issuance of permits or supervision with regard to the banking and credit system, the securities market or the insurance business. Information concerning the business or management conditions of the person whom FI’s activities concerns, is protected by secrecy, if it can be assumed that economic losses would be entailed if the information should be disclosed. Furthermore, information concerning the economic conditions of personal circumstances of the client of a company under supervision by FI is protected by secrecy. Chapter 14 of the Secrecy Act provides the situations when disclosure is mandatory under Swedish law. Secrecy shall not hinder the communication of information to for example the Swedish Parliament and the Swedish government and another supervisory authority. Furthermore, confidential information concerning suspicion of crime may be disclosed to the Public Prosecution Authority, the Police force or to an authority which has to take action against the crime if imprisonment is prescribed for the crime and this is presumed to give rise to another sanction than fine penalty. Information that FI receives according to an agreement with a foreign authority cannot be disclosed if disclosure were in breach of the agreement.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	The rules of confidentiality regarding the information FI has access to in the discharge of its duties, as well the disclosure of such information, are in place. FI has yet to enter into MOU’s with some of the authorities in countries where Swedish banks have a presence.
Principle 2.	Permissible Activities The permissible activities of institutions that are licensed and subject to supervision as banks must be clearly defined, and the use of the word “bank” in names should be controlled as far as possible.
Description	The term “bank” is defined in Chapter 1 Section 1 the Banking Business Act as banking companies, savings banks, and members’ banks. Banking business may only be conducted following authorization (license) from FI, or in exceptional cases from the government. An authorization may only be given to banks. The permissible activities of banks are defined in Chapter 2 the Banking Business Act. The list corresponds to Annex 1 to the European Directive 2000/12/EC relating to credit institutions. A bank may engage in the following activities: 1. borrow funds, inter alia, by issuing bonds or other similar debt instruments; 2. grant and broker loans, inter alia, in the form of consumer loans and loans secured by real property or instruments of indebtedness; 3. participate in conjunction with financing, inter alia, by acquiring claims and leasing personal property; 4. negotiate payments; 5. provide means of payment; 6. issue guarantees and assume similar obligations; 7. participate in issues of securities; 8. provide financial advice; 9. hold securities in safekeeping; 10. conduct documentary credit operations; 11. act as a custodian institution for securities funds; 12. participate in sales of insurance services; 13. provide debt collection services; 14. provide bank safe deposit services; 15. conduct currency trading; 16. conduct securities business subject to the conditions prescribed in the Securities Operations Act; and 17. provide credit information subject to the conditions prescribed in the Credit Information Act. In addition, banks may conduct operations that have a natural connection with deposits or with operations as set forth in the list. Chapter 2 the Banking Business Act also states additional permissible activities that do not have a direct connection with banking business such as acquisition of shares and so on. Where a special cause exists, a bank may be authorized by FI to provide postal services. Further details are also issued in FI’s regulations and guidelines. No entity other than a bank, the Central Bank of Sweden, the Swedish General Mortgage Bank and foreign banking undertakings may use the word “bank” in its name or otherwise in conjunction with a description of its business. However, an association or other legal entity with a close affiliation to a bank may, with FI’s authorization, use the word “bank” in its name. According to Chapter 7 Section 21 the Banking Business Act, where any person conducts banking business without being licensed to do so, FI shall order such person to cease such operations on pain of a conditional fine. Where there is doubt as to whether the operations include deposits, FI may order the person conducting the operations to furnish any information regarding the operations required in order to determine whether deposit operations are being conducted. As to foreign undertakings, an order may be addressed to both the undertaking as well as any person conducting operations in Sweden on behalf of the undertaking. Banking business is defined in the Banking Business Act as operations which include the acceptance of deposits on account where the balance is determined in nominal amounts and is available to the depositor on short notice. Banking business may only be conducted following authorization and an authorization may only be given to banks. However, where an undertaking accepts customer funds on account, they do not constitute deposits provided the balance for each customer does not exceed SKR 15,000 and the balance is only available to the customer for payment for goods and services which are produced or sold by the undertaking; or by another undertaking in the same group or in the same group of undertakings with close economic affiliation or in connection with the closure of the account. According to Chapter 1 Section 2b the Banking Business Act, it is not considered to be a banking activity if an economic association conducts deposit operations, provided the association: receives deposits only from its own members; only intends to use members’ deposits to satisfy the financing requirements of the members; only accepts natural persons as members; and has no more than 1,000 members. No new association may use the legal provision as a basis for pursuing these activities without a license. An undertaking which offers deposits on account in accordance with Chapter 1, Sections 2 a and 2 b, the Banking Business Act shall specify in conjunction with its advertising, displays, and other marketing of account services that the balance on the account is not covered by the deposit guarantee in accordance with the Deposit Guarantee Act. Prior to execution of an account agreement, the account operator must inform the depositor that the balance on the account is not covered by the deposit guarantee. The information must be provided in writing. The Marketing Practices Act shall apply in the event an undertaking fails to provide the information or other information that is of particular significance from a consumer perspective.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	The term bank has been given a definition in law. The supervisor may order a person to stop the banking activities it has commenced without a legal license on the pain of a conditional fine. To conduct unauthorized banking activities is not criminalized. A banking law committee has drafted a preliminary version for a revised banking act. The proposal includes a definition for activities that need authorization that would be more adaptable to changing products and techniques in the market.
Principle 3.	Licensing Criteria The licensing authority must have the right to set criteria and reject applications for establishments that do not meet the standards set. The licensing process, at a minimum, should consist of an assessment of the banking organization’s ownership structure, directors and senior management, its operating plan and internal controls, and its projected financial condition, including its capital base; where the proposed owner or parent organization is a foreign bank, the prior consent of its home country supervisor should be obtained.
Description	The criteria for licensing banks is set in Chapter 9 the Banking Business Act. The criteria set in law correspond to Directive 2000/12/EC the Credit Institution Directive. Some additional criteria are set in the Banking Business Ordinance. Furthermore, FI has issued a guideline with information about the requirements concerning an application for a banking license. The basic criteria for issuing licenses, such as soundness, fit-and-proper test of the Board of Directors and of qualified shareholders, are examined in the ongoing supervision of the institution. The capital adequacy rules are upheld through the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act. According to Chapter 7 Section 1 the Banking Business Act, a bank must furnish FI with any information regarding its operation and circumstances requested by FI. FI may reject the application for a banking license if the essential criteria set in law and regulations are not met. If an application for a banking license is not complete, the applicant may asked to complete it according to FI’s instructions at the risk of the application being rejected. The applicant has the right to express its opinion before a rejection. Where the company will have a close affiliation with a third party, the articles of association may only be approved by FI and a license be granted where the relations will not impede the effective supervision of the bank. Furthermore, FI may reject a bank’s plans to outsource its activities if this would impede the effective supervision of the bank. Chapter 8 the Companies Act regulates the management of a limited company. The Companies Act that has to be followed also by banks stipulates, among other things, the responsibilities and duties of the Board of Directors. FI has issued regulations and guidelines regarding the internal control in banks. The regulations and guidelines state in more detail the responsibility of the bank’s Board of Directors. An independent audit function shall also be set up within the bank. The major shareowners of a new bank are evaluated by FI according to the same principles as are adopted in the on-going evaluation of ownership control according to Chapter 7 Section 10 the Banking Business Act (see also Chapter 4). The bank must give information to FI regarding the complete ownership structure. If a bank belongs to a group, the type of business the other entities in the group are engaged must be reported as well as the exact amount of shares they are holding. An economic entity as a founder of a new bank must provide its profit and loss statement as well as the consolidated statement for the group. A minimum initial capital amount of 5 million euros is stipulated for all banks. According to the Banking Business Act, a bank’s capital base may never be less than the amount that was required as initial capital. According to the Banking Business Ordinance, prior to commencing operations a bank must submit to FI a certificate by a chartered accountant that the minimal capital as stated in Chapter 9 Section 4 the Banking Business Act has been fully paid. FI evaluates the proposed Board of Directors and the managing director, both when they are proposed in an application for banking license and during on-going business. Chapter 9 Section 3 the Banking Business Act stipulates that a charter shall be granted where the persons who will constitute the company’s boards of directors or serve as the managing director or the acting managing director possess sufficient insight and experience in order to participate in the management of a bank and are otherwise suitable for such a task. The guidelines FFFS 1998:14 issued by FI gives more detailed information of the fit-and-proper-test. A charter is not granted if a member of the Board of Directors or the managing director or his deputy has to a significant extent failed to perform his obligations in commercial operations or in other financial affairs or has been convicted of a serious criminal offence. All members of a bank’s senior management are not subject to such a fit-and-proper test. According to the Banking Business Ordinance, a bank’s operating plan has to be submitted in connection with an application for a license. The plan must include a description of the projected operations of the bank. FI reviews that corporate governance and internal controls of the bank are in accordance with the principles set out in law and in the guidelines by FI. FI monitors that the institution have written procedures for important spheres of activity and adequate internal control mechanisms. Particularly, there must be a description of risk monitoring and management of credit risk, interest rate risk, and exchange and liquidity risks. FI guidelines require that internal regulations for the bank’s Board of Directors be drawn up. FI has also issued regulations and guidelines regarding the prevention of criminal activities connected with banking activities. According to the Banking Business Ordinance, a prognosis for the bank’s economic results for the next three years must be submitted to FI. The forecast must be drafted for both the bank and the group that the bank is going to be part of. There must also be an analysis of the capital requirements for the different risk areas. If a foreign banking company which maintains its registered office in a country within the EEA intends to establish a branch in Sweden, it is not required to a obtain a license from FI. FI receives notification from a competent supervisory authority in the undertaking’s home country which contains prescribed information. The procedure in law corresponds to that set forth in the Credit Institutions Directive. As to foreign banking companies from outside the EEA intending to establish a branch in Sweden, a license issued by FI is needed. Prior to issuing a license, FI follows the policy of asking the home country authority’s opinion in order to make sure that the planned business may be assumed to fulfill the requirements of sound banking operations. As regards foreign banking companies intending to establish a subsidiary in Sweden, an application for authorization must always be submitted to FI. If the owners are foreign physical persons or foreign legal entities, it is FI’s policy to contact the foreign supervisory authority in order to determine the suitability of the foreign owners of the bank. No requirement to obtain the foreign authority’s statement of no objection is stated in law. If FI determines that the license was knowingly based on false information, FI can ask the bank for corrections. If on the basis of the false information the sound development of the bank’s operations may be expected to be jeopardized and the bank’s management has been proved to be unsuitable to exercise such operations to which the charter relates, the bank’s charter may be revoked or the bank may be given a warning. The assessment of the application by FI is not regularly directed to the ability of the shareholders to supply additional financial support. There are no explicit rules and regulations regarding the composition of the Board of Directors. The general fit-and-proper tests of the members of the Board of Directors make it possible for FI to see to that the board is properly composed. The Board of Directors is required to have a broad competence. The fit-and-proper test is of a formal character and is mostly related to the question of the members not being convicted of crimes. No special arrangements are in place for monitoring the progress for new entrants. An inspection is normally made within one year after the bank has been given a license. The inspection is being made in order to monitor the bank’s business and to determine that the supervisory requirements are being met.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	The standards for a banking license are stipulated in laws and ordinances as well as FI’s guidelines. The fit and proper test do not concern all the members of a bank’s management, i.e., only the members of the Board of Directors and the managing director and deputy managing director are subjected to fit and proper testing. There are no detailed criteria for assessing the suitability of management. The economic situation of the principal shareholders is assessed only through public financial statements. FI, although not required by law, in practice consults the foreign supervisor if a foreign bank from outside the EEA wishes to establish a branch or subsidiary in Sweden.
Principle 4.	Ownership Banking supervisors must have the authority to review and reject any proposals to transfer significant ownership or controlling interests in existing banks to other parties.
Description	In the Banking Business Act a “qualified holding” is defined as a direct or indirect ownership in an undertaking where the holding represents 10 percent or more of the share capital or the voting capital or where the holding otherwise renders it possible to exercise significant influence over the management of the undertaking. FI has issued guideline FFFS 1998:14 on the monitoring of qualified holdings, i.e., ownership control. A direct or indirect acquisition of shares or interests in a bank which causes the acquirer’s total holdings to amount to a qualified holding may only be made with the explicit prior consent of FI. The same applies to acquisitions which involve an increase in a qualified holding so that it amounts to or exceeds 20, 33, or 50 percent of the share capital or the voting capital for all shares or interests or which result in the bank becoming a subsidiary. (Where the acquisition has occurred as a result of division of joint marital property, by inheritance, by will, corporate distribution, etc., consent for retaining the shares or interests must be applied for by the acquirer within six months from the time the shares or interests were obtained). Consent shall be granted to the acquisition where it may be assumed that the acquirer will not hinder the sound development of the bank’s operations and where the acquirer is otherwise suitable to exercise a significant influence over the management of the bank. Consent may not be granted where the acquirer, to a significant extent, has failed to perform his obligations in commercial operations or in other financial affairs or has been convicted of a serious criminal offence. Where the acquisition would result in close affiliation between the bank and a third party, consent shall be granted only where the affiliation does not hinder an effective supervision of the bank. FI may prescribe a certain period within which an acquisition must be completed. FI must be informed in the event that any person intends to divest himself of a qualified holding or such a significant part thereof that the holding will accordingly be less than any of the limits as specified above (20, 33 or 50 percent). Where a legal entity holds a qualified holding in a bank, it shall inform FI as soon as possible concerning any changes to its management. Where any legal or physical person which holds a qualified holding of shares or interests exercises, or may be deemed to be able to exercise its influence in a manner which hinders sound development of the operations of the bank, FI may determine that such a person, at general meetings, may not represent more shares or interests than those which correspond to a holding which is not qualified. This shall also apply where such a holder, to a significant extent, has failed to perform his obligations in commercial operations or in other financial affairs or has been convicted of a serious criminal offence. Where a person which holds a qualified holding of shares or interests fails to submit an application for consent to an acquisition, FI may determine that such person, may not represent the shares or the interests at general meetings to the extent they exceed a qualified holding until consent has not been obtained from FI. Where any person, in contravention of a decision by FI, possesses a qualified holding of shares or interests, such person may not represent the shares or interests at a general meeting to the extent the holding is in contravention of the decision. FI may order such a person to divest himself of a sufficient number of the shares or interests in order for the holding to be no longer qualified. An owner may also be ordered to divest himself of shares or interests if the holding is in contravention of FI’s decision. Where a bank has a close affiliation with a third party and such an affiliation hinders the effective supervision of the bank, FI may order the holder of shares or interests which gives rise to close affiliation to divest itself of a sufficient number of shares or interests to put an end to the close affiliation. According to Chapter 7 Section 13 a the Banking Business Act, where a legal entity holds a qualified holding in a bank, the entity shall inform FI as soon as possible of any changes to its management. FI does not on a continuous basis review the financial information of the principal shareholders of the bank if not motivated by specific reasons. A bank shall notify any acquisition or divestment that will affect the qualified holdings to FI as soon as possible. A bank shall submit an annual statement to FI containing the names of persons who hold a qualified holding of shares or interests in the bank and the amount of such holdings.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	None
Principle 5.	Investment Criteria Banking supervisors must have the authority to establish criteria for reviewing major acquisitions or investments by a bank and ensuring that corporate affiliations or structures do not expose the bank to undue risks or hinder effective supervision.
Description	According to Chapter 2 Section 5 the Banking Business Act, a bank may acquire another bank’s business, provided the acquisition is not deemed to be prejudicial to the public interest. If the acquisition relates to all or a significant part of the business, an authorization by FI is required. A bank may, equally following authorization, acquire shares or interests in a Swedish or foreign bank or in a Swedish or foreign non-banking undertaking if the acquisition may be deemed to be beneficial for the banking system or the general public. The same applies to guarantees or subordinated loans issued by such companies. A bank may be authorized to acquire shares or interests in a Swedish or foreign insurance company, and a savings bank or a cooperative bank may be authorized to acquire shares in a Swedish insurance company, if the acquisition is included as a part of the organization of the operations. As to real estate or other property, in addition to what a bank needs for its own business operations, a bank may acquire such property in order to secure a claim. Property acquired shall be disposed of as soon as deemed appropriate taking into account the market conditions, however without giving rise to a loss to the bank. In addition to holdings in banks, insurance companies and real estate property, and property that has been acquired as collateral, a bank may acquire shares equal to 30 percent of its capital base. The total amount of holdings in and loans to one company, may not exceed an aggregate of 5 percent of the amount equivalent to 30 percent of the bank’s capital. The limits are applied to all companies belonging to the group with the exception of insurance companies and their subsidiaries of nonfinancial nature. Within the limits above (30/5 percent rule) a shareholding may not, without the consent of FI, exceed 5 percent of the voting capital for all the shares in an individual company. Where the bank is part of a group, the limitation shall apply to the group’s total shareholdings. However, shares that are held by insurance undertakings within the group or by subsidiaries of insurance undertakings shall be disregarded. If any of the limits are exceeded, the holding or the obligations shall be disposed of to the extent of the excess as soon as appropriate. The rules regarding capital base and capital requirement in the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act and in the regulation FFFS 2000:6 by FI can be considered to hinder acquisitions if they will so severely affect the capital base and the capital adequacy so they will fall below stipulated levels. Banks and other companies in a group shall possess such administrative and accounting routines which ensure effective verification of compliance with the provisions the act. If adequate standards are not followed, FI shall order such an undertaking in a group responsible for group-based accounting to take appropriate measures in order to rectify the situation. When a bank has a close affiliation with a third party and the affiliation hinders the effective supervision of the bank FI may, according to Chapter 7 Section 14 b the Banking Business Act order the holder of shares or interests which gives rise to the affiliation to divest itself of a sufficient number of shares or interests. In cases where a prior approval by FI is not needed, there is no requirement to make a notification.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	Laws set limits for investments in other undertakings. FI’s consent is needed for large individual acquisitions. In laws and regulations there are, however, no requirements as to reporting to the supervisor of certain types of investments.
Principle 6.	Capital Adequacy Banking supervisors must set minimum capital adequacy requirements for banks that reflect the risks that the bank undertakes, and must define the components of capital, bearing in mind its ability to absorb losses. For internationally active banks, these requirements must not be less than those established in the Basel Capital Accord.
Description	All EU directives on capital adequacy are implemented through the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act and regulation issued by FI concerning capital adequacy and large exposures (FFFS 2000:6). The Basle Capital Accord with amendments has been complied with. The rules on capital adequacy apply not only to internationally active banking companies but also to the following institutions: savings banks, cooperative banks, credit market companies, securities companies, and the Swedish Ship Mortgage Bank. The EU directive on the own funds of credit institutions is fully implemented through Chapter 2 the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act and Chapter 3 of the regulation (FFFS 2000:6) of FI. Capital adequacy is calculated on solo and consolidated basis according to Chapter 6 of the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act. The provisions set forth in Chapter 2, Section 2 regarding capital requirements for credit risks, in Chapter 2, and sections 3-5 regarding capital requirements for market risks, shall also apply to a financial group of undertakings. A financial group of undertakings shall provide information on the companies which make up the group to the extent and within the time frame stipulated by FI’s guidelines (FFFS 2000:7) on the reporting of qualified holdings and subsidiaries, etc. If the composition of the financial group of undertakings is changed during the course of a current financial year, information concerning the changes shall be provided on the aforementioned form by the end of the quarter in question (closing date). Chapter 7 Section 12 the Act on Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures states that when an institution or a financial group of undertakings has a capital base which is less than the minimum amount required FI shall order the institution or the mother company in a group to take appropriate measures in order to rectify the situation. Where FI issues injunctions pursuant to this Act, FI may make such orders subject to conditional fines. FI can issue a warning and then revoke the banking license if the capital ratio has not been raised within three months to the legal minimum (Chapter 7 Section 16 of the Banking Business Act). FI may grant an extension to the time period. Chapter 16 of the regulation by FI concerning capital adequacy and large exposures concerns reporting: all institutions and financial groups of undertakings shall provide the information requested on the “Capital adequacy report” form, in Appendix 3, on March 31, June 30, September 30 and December 31 (closing dates). The reports shall reach FI no later than the last banking day in the month after each closing date. The supervisor is not empowered by law to set minimum requirements higher than the legal minimum depending on the conditions under which the banking system and individual banks operate. The supervisor does not effectively determine that banks have an internal process for assessing their overall capital adequacy in relation to their risk profile. FI monitors the adherence of banks to the capital ratios that they have declared as their goals. FI has informal contacts on the matter with a bank’s management. A bank’s capital base may not be less than the amount which was required at the time of licensing. In accordance with Chapter 9, Section 4 the Banking Business Act, a bank company must have a restricted equity which, at the time of the decision regarding a charter, amounts to not less than five million euros. Chapter 5, Section 4 of the Annual Reports of Credit Institutions and Securities Companies Act contains provisions concerning what constitutes restricted equity. Corresponding stipulations are in the Savings Banks Act and the Members banks Act.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	The capital adequacy requirements are in line with the Basle Accord. The supervisor has no legal powers to require a ratio higher than the legal minimum on the grounds of higher risk content in a bank’s business or the general operating environment.
Principle 7.	Credit Policies An essential part of any supervisory system is the independent evaluation of a bank’s policies, practices, and procedures related to the granting of loans and making of investments and the ongoing management of the loan and investment portfolios.
Description	Section 3 of the general guideline (FFFS 1995:49) of FI concerning credit risks in credit institutions and securities companies require that the board of the bank establish credit policies, practices and procedures. The board of the bank should according to Section 10 in the guideline (FFFS 1999:12) on management, internal information and internal control also issue guidelines for the internal audit on how to monitor the adherence of the credit policies, practices and procedures. The audit function should report direct to the board of the bank and to the managing director. In the general guideline it is also required that the board should ensure that policies, practices and procedures and review of risks are sufficient. Regarding credit risks a bank should have a specific controller function regularly monitoring the credit risks according to Section 15 in the general guideline (FFFS 1995:49). Control should be directed, in particular, to compliance of credit policies and instructions, identification, measurement, and reporting of credit risks. The quality of credit procedures and monitoring should be reported to management on a continuous basis. FI verifies, through periodic on-site examinations the presence of policy and instructions and how these are implemented and monitored within the bank. At on-site examinations the adherence to the stipulation of the general guideline (FFFS 1995:49) is assessed. In Chapter 2 Section 17 of the Banking Business Act there is a requirement that credits be extended to connected parties on an arm’s length basis on normal terms applied in the bank’s business. In certain cases FI has powers to determine to which parties the rule is to be applicable. Banks are expected to create a specific list with all physical and legal entities belonging to “connected or related parties”/ the group and, if credits are granted, with specifications as to size and terms and conditions. The list must be handed over to FI on request. In Section 14 in the guideline (FFFS 1995:49) on credit risks it is required that the board of the bank establish an internal communication system enabling the board to have access to all relevant information on the credit function and that all relevant persons and bodies within the bank receive the information on necessary for their duties. The general guideline (FFFS 1999:12) by FI also requires that the board should establish an information system providing relevant information about the business activities at any time. It is also stated in Section 6 of the guideline that unless otherwise stipulated, information must be reported to FI in the format it is available through the bank’s internal communication system. In Chapter 7, Section 1, the Banking Business Act it is stated that a bank has to provide FI with requested information about its business activities and related circumstances, and FI is vested with the authority to make on-and off-site examinations whenever it deems necessary. Legally there are no formal requirements for the banks to have in use various levels of decision-making. In practice all banks apply segregated levels of decision depending on the risks and the sort of business area concerned. The articles of association of a bank establish the general guidelines for granting of credits and indicate possible limitations. Accordingly, the credit policy that has to be established according to guideline (FFFS 1995:49) must be in line with the articles of association. Procedures and delegation of powers in connection with the granting of credits are to be described in the credit instructions. It must be stated in the instructions which decisions must always be made by the board. Section 14 in the guideline (FFFS 1995:49) requires that the board should establish a management information system providing relevant and well structured information about handling and granting of credits and related risks. Section 6 in the guideline (FFFS 1999:12) requires that the board of the bank establish an information system providing relevant information about the business activities at any time. In Chapter 4 Section 8a in the Regulation (FFFS 2000:18) concerning the annual reports of banks it is required that each bank monitor all its problem credits, disregarding the type of borrower or the domicile of the borrower. Monitoring has to take place at least in connection with the annual report and interim reports; a loan is to be treated as sub-standard if the creditor is financial difficulties, the loan is in default, or a bankruptcy or a restructuring seems imminent. The limit structure and decision making process of a bank sets limits for credits to individual counter parties.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	FI has given guidelines for the setting of a bank’s credit policies and internal instructions. For the performance of on-site supervision the supervisor has issued a manual.
Principle 8.	Loan Evaluation and Loan-Loss Provisioning Banking supervisors must be satisfied that banks establish and adhere to adequate policies, practices, and procedures for evaluating the quality of assets and the adequacy of loan-loss provisions and reserves.
Description	According to Section 10 in the guideline (FFFS 1995:49) by FI on credit risks there must be written instructions concerning the review of individual credits. Credit limits should be reported and reviewed on an annual basis. Accordingly, credit limits should be presented and approved at least once a year by the same authority within the bank that initially approved the original credit limit. In connection with the review an asset/risk classification should be made. Regarding problem credits or credits with higher risk than normal it is each bank’s duty to evaluate and classify such credits according to risk. Decisions regarding provisioning are made jointly by the bank and its external auditors. A review shall be made at least at the end of each financial year according to Chapter 4 Section 8, a–g, of FI regulation concerning annual reports (FFFS 2000:18). In Chapter 2, Section 4, page 5, of the Annual Reports Act (1995:1554) approves only provision made on an individual credit basis, i.e., a bank may not make provision for a whole sector. FI monitors the provisioning at on-site examinations when FI requires the bank to present a list of the 10 largest exposures and a list of its 10 riskiest exposures. In addition to this FI can request a list for the loans in arrears for 60 days or more. The bank’s policy regarding asset/risk classification and provisioning shall be in line with current accounting practices as provided in the Annual Report Act (1995:1554), Chapter 4 in the Annual Reports of Credit Institutions and Securities Companies Act (1995:1559) and Chapter 4 in the Regulations and General Guidelines (FFFS 2000:18) by FI concerning annual reports of credit institutions and securities companies. The external auditor and the auditor appointed by FI regularly review the policy and monitor the implementation. Such a review must be made at least once a year. FI monitors and reviews, through on-site examinations, bank policies concerning identification of problem credits and provisioning. The system for asset/risk classification and provisioning applies to both on and off balance sheet exposures according to Chapter 4 in the guidelines (FFFS 2000:18) and in Chapter 4 of the Annual Reports of Credit Institutions and Securities Companies Act (1995:1559). FI requires banks to have policies and instructions in order to safeguard a realistic market value of the assets after provisioning. However, FI does not verify that policies and instructions implemented by a bank are sufficient to guarantee that the value of an asset after reservations made and/or write-offs actually reflects the actual market value. This is instead primarily verified by the bank’s external auditor in cooperation with the auditor appointed by FI based on appropriate rules for evaluation provided in Chapter 4 Section 1 of the Act on Annual Reports of Credit Institution and Securities Companies and in Chapter 4 of the Regulations and General Guidelines (FFFS 2000:18) by FI concerning annual reports of credit institutions and securities companies. According to Section 11 in the general guideline (FFFS 1995:49) by FI concerning credit risks, a bank should establish a system enabling analysis of the structure of the whole credit portfolio, the quality and its development over time. It is the responsibility of each individual bank to implement appropriate procedures and sufficient organizational resources. Regarding problem credits and collecting past due loans FI monitors whether a bank has appropriate/ sufficient resources for the ongoing oversight of problem credits and for collecting past due loans. FI ‘s unit of statistics receives quarterly information from banks on problem credits. Collecting past due loans is an integrated and normal part of credit handling by banks. The handling of problem credits and collecting past due loans within the bank is regularly reviewed in connection with FI’s on-site examinations. FI does not have legal powers to require a bank to strengthen its lending practices or credit granting standards, or to strengthen its overall financial strength. Sections 4 and 8 in the General Guidelines (FFFS 1995:49) concerning credit risks require that credit policies contain guidelines for sound credit. FI may not legally require a bank to alter the level of loan loss provisions. However, FI makes recommendations with respect to banks’ overall credit standards and provisioning practices. Rules and limits concerning provisions are set in Chapter 4 of the Act on Annual Reports and the regulation (FFFS 2000:18) by FI on annual reports of credit institutions and securities companies. FI’s unit for statistics receives information problem loans and provisioning on a quarterly basis in accordance with Section 2 in Regulation (FFFS 2000:23) concerning quarterly and yearly reporting of financial accounts. Sections 8 and 10 of the guideline (FFFS 1995:49) on credit risks require that instructions be set up for assessing of collateral in connection with the granting of new credits and when credit exposures are reviewed. The Annual Report Act, the Act on Annual Reports of Credit Institutions and Securities Companies and the 4 Chapter in regulation (FFFS 2000:18) by FI concerning annual reports of credit institutions and securities companies require that collateral shall be reviewed at least annually. Credit limits should be reported and reviewed at least annually according to Section 9 in the guideline (FFFS 1995:49) by FI. Chapter 4 Section 8a in the regulation (FFFS 2000:18) by FI concerning annual reports of credit institutions and securities companies states when a loan shall be identified as impaired. A loan is classified as impaired on the basis of information of the creditor’s financial difficulties, and if the loan has not been serviced according to contract; interest payments in arrears for more than 60 days is given as a strong indication. A substandard loan is valued according to the likely repayment expectations which is based on either the future discounted cashflows, the realistic value of collateral or the market value of the receivable. The valuation of collateral is required to reflect the net realizable value. Collateral is required to be valued at current value, which according to Chapter 4 Section 5 in the regulation (FFFS 2000:18) is realizable/ market value less the estimated transaction costs. The current value equals the market value when such has been established. If no market is established the current value has to be based on various estimations. Loans are required to be classified when payments are contractually 60 days in arrears, judged from the original terms of the loan according regulation (FFFS 2000:18) by FI. Refinancing of loans that would otherwise fall into arrears does not lead to improved classification for such loans. Rules for restructuring loans and declassification of loans to normal status are stipulated in Chapter 4, Section 8 f and g, in regulation (FFFS 2000:18) by FI. Chapter 4, Section 8 c, in regulation FFFS 2000:18 by FI requires that valuation, classification and provisioning for credits should be conducted on an individual basis. Loans should be valued individually unless they form a group of small homogeneous loans according to Chapter 4 Section 10 of the regulation FFFS 2000:18. If they form a small homogeneous group the bank is requested to justify the basis of general provisioning through historical data, statistics or other relevant information. No general writedowns/provisions are accepted except for the “homogenous groups” of credits.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	The supervisor has no legally based authority to require a bank to strengthen its lending practices, credit-granting standards, level of provisions and reserves. The supervisor has neither binding powers to make a bank adopt policies that will affect the overall financial strength if it deems the level of problem assets to be of concern. However, the banks generally follow FI’s recommendations concerning credit policies and practices.
Principle 9.	Large Exposure Limits Banking supervisors must be satisfied that banks have management information systems that enable management to identify concentrations within the portfolio, and supervisors must set prudential limits to restrict bank exposures to single borrowers or groups of related borrowers.
Description	Chapter 5, Section 2, of the Act (1994:2004) on Capital Adequacy and Large Exposure defines the term” group of customers.” Section 9 in General Guidelines (FFFS 1995:49) by FI concerning credit risks in credit institutions and securities companies require that each individual bank include guidelines regarding “limits for related group of borrowers” in its credit instructions. The Act on Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures for Credit Institutions and Securities Companies and Regulations and General Guidelines (FFFS 2000:6) by Finansinspektionen concerning capital adequacy and large exposure sets the limits on exposures towards a single borrower or a closely related group of borrowers. Large exposures must be reported to the supervisor. These are defined to be equal to 10 percent or more of the capital base against one counterparty or a group of customers forming one counterparty. An exposure against one counterparty may not exceed 25 percent of the capital base. The sum of the large exposures has to be less than 800 percent of the capital base. The rules apply both to on- and off- balance exposures. FI monitors large exposures through the reports and on-site examinations. FI’s guideline FFFS 1995:49 states that a bank’s internal instructions must have provisions for credit monitoring. The reporting lines must also be established. It is the duty of the board to see to that an information system on credit policies and adjacent risk management is functioning. It has been decided at FI that as from 2002-01-01 reporting should also include concentrations to industry sectors (FFFS 2001:11). Reporting is currently made on a semiannual basis but reporting should take place as from the beginning of 2002 on a quarterly basis. Where the exposures exceed any of the limits set forth above, the institution responsible for group-based accounting shall notify without delay to FI. The authority may establish a certain period of time during which the exposures must be reduced to the permitted limits. If the exposures are not reduced to the permitted levels FI shall order the institution to take appropriate measures to rectify the situation. All Swedish banks must adhere to the definitions described in the Act on Adequacy and Large Exposures and Regulations and General Guidelines (FFFS 2000:6) by FI concerning capital adequacy and large exposures. No deviations from the limits are acceptable according to the law.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	Supervisory reports on large exposures are currently produced on a semi-annual basis. From 2002 onward reports will be made on a quarterly basis. Reporting will from the beginning of 2002 include information on exposures to sectors.
Principle 10.	Connected Lending In order to prevent abuses arising from connected lending, banking supervisors must have in place requirements that banks lend to related companies and individuals on an arm’s-length basis, that such extensions of credit are effectively monitored, and that other appropriate steps are taken to control or mitigate the risks.
Description	Connected lending is regulated in Chapter 2 Section 17 of the Banking Business Act where a comprehensive definition of “connected or related parties” exists. The following persons are included in the definition: 1. a member of the Board of Directors; 2. a delegate in a management position who, alone or together with a third party, is authorized to determine lending matters incumbent on the Board of Directors; 3. an employee who hold a senior position within the bank; 4. shareholders or owners of interests other than the State with a holding equal to at least three percent of the issued share capital; 5. a spouse or cohabitee of a person referred to above; or 6. a legal entity in which such persons as referred to above have a significant financial interest in their capacity as owners or members. Loans may not be extended on terms and conditions different from those normally imposed on customers. FI has discretion to make a judgment about connectedness as to items 2 and 3 above. Each individual bank has to create a specific list including all physical and legal entities belonging to the group and when credits are granted on what terms and conditions and to what amount. The list must be handed over to FI on request. There is no formal recommendation that credits to connected parties be handled and/or subject to approval by a body of a certain level in a bank’s hierarchy. It is stated that such credits shall be handled and approved in accordance with the normal procedure in the bank. Sections 2 and 4 of the guideline (FFFS 1998:22) by FI concerning handling of ethical questions require that each individual bank establish ethical guidelines regarding granting of credits. The guideline requires in particular that banks have systems set up for monitoring credit granting out of moral, ethical and legal perspectives. It is stated in Section 8 of the guideline concerning credit risk (FFFS 1995:49) that the same person is not to have both credit-granting functions and customer account responsibilities. Chapter 2 Section 17 of the Banking Business Act requires that credit granting to “connected and related parties” shall correspond to normal terms and conditions applied by the bank. FI has no authority to set limits to loans to connected parties or deduct such loans from capital when assessing capital adequacy. The total amount of loans to connected parties shall be handled on the same basis as loans to other borrowers of the bank, and is limited only by the rules in the Act on Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures. The act also requires that the board of a bank be able to identify the cases of connected lending. FI has followed a policy of requiring banks to have in the specification the names of all physical and legal entities identified as connected or related parties and the terms and conditions and the amount as well as the total amount. FI does not on a continuous basis obtain information on connected lending from banks. Chapter 2 Section 17 of the Banking Business Act provides a definition of a connected party. In individual cases FI has authority to determine who is to be included. The size of the lending to a connected parties is not limited in special rules but it is ultimately set by the general rules in the Act on Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	The rule of arm’s length and the concept of connected parties are established in law. There is no requirement that credits to connected or related parties should be decided at a certain level. FI has no authority to set individual limits to connected lending or deduct loans extended on concessionary grounds from the bank’s capital. Although authorized to do so in law, FI has not deemed it necessary to issue regulations on the register of connected lending. No arrangements have been made for regular reporting to the supervisor of connected lending on an individual or aggregate basis.
Principle 11.	Country Risk Banking supervisors must be satisfied that banks have adequate policies and procedures for identifying, monitoring, and controlling country risk and transfer risk in their international lending and investment activities, and for maintaining appropriate reserves against such risks.
Description	The FI determines through onsite and offsite inspections that banks’ policies and procedures give due regard to the identification, monitoring and control of country risk and transfer risk. Country risk and transfer risk is integrated as a part of the total credit risk. Section 14 in the guideline (FFFS 1995:49) by FI on credit risks requires that the board of a bank should establish a management information system providing relevant and well structured information about handling and granting of credits and related risks. The guideline does not specifically mention country risks. FI verifies through on–site examinations that the banks have adequate information systems, risk management systems and internal control systems. No general provision for country or transfer risk is permitted in the law and regulations. Provisioning may only be made for credits identified as problem credits according to Chapter 4 Section 8h in the regulation (FFFS 2001:19) by FI concerning annual reports. Each credit shall be evaluated individually. It is also stated in the regulation that provisioning, if any, shall be stated in the annual report. The bank decides the appropriate provisioning for each individual credit and the auditor verifies the provisioning. Riksbank provides upon request FI with information on country risks by bank.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	Finansinspektionen receives and evaluates country risk and transfer risk on a quarterly basis on the basis of information derived from quarterly reports. FI has no specific guidelines concerning country risk. Finansinspektionen has access to the reports given by the banks to the Riksbank regarding country risk exposures to individual countries. A bank decides the appropriate provisioning for each individual credit and the auditor verifies the provisioning.
Principle 12.	Market Risks Banking supervisors must be satisfied that banks have in place systems that accurately measure, monitor, and adequately control market risks; supervisors should have powers to impose specific limits and/or a specific capital charge on market risk exposure, if warranted.
Description	The directive on the Capital charge for market risk (CAD 1) was implemented in January 1996 by the Act on Capital Adequacy and Large exposures. FI has issued the regulation (FFFS 2000:6) concerning capital adequacy and large exposures. In 2000 FI implemented general guideline (FFFS 2000:10) concerning management of market and liquidity risks in credit institutions and investment firms. Section 6 of the general guideline stipulates that banks should have written policies and instructions concerning identification, measuring, reporting, monitoring and control of market risk. FI’s guideline (FFFS 1999:12) concerning management, internal information and internal control also deals with the issue of policies. Section 4 of these general guidelines stipulates that the Board of Directors should see to it that the management and control of risks in the bank are arranged in a satisfactory manner. Policies for relevant risks should be issued for this purpose. FI monitors the compliance of the laws, regulations and general guidelines through the analysis of reports and by carrying out on-site supervision. In the on-site supervisory work inspectors are guided by relevant manuals. Section 7 of FI’s general guideline (FFFS 2000:10) on management of market and liquidity risks stipulates that banks must have limits for market risks. The limits should be set for the bank as a whole and for position taking units. Limits should be set for an operational unit as a whole and for different trading desks, products and individual traders. FI examines banks’ limits and limit setting policies and procedures through the on-site supervision work. For those banks’ that have authorization to use the Internal Models Approach for market risk capital requirements, FI has the power to set the multiplier above the stipulated 3 subsequent to performing a qualitative valuation of a bank’s risk management systems (Chapter 11 Section 7 in FI’s regulation on capital adequacy and large exposures, FFFS 2000:6). At present no Swedish bank has the authorization to use the Internal Models Approach for market risk capital requirements. Two banks have applied for an authorization and FI is currently in the process of evaluating these models. Apart from the above the supervisor has no powers to impose a capital or specific limits on market risk exposure. Section 10 of FI’s general guidelines (FFFS 2000:10) concerning management of market–and liquidity risks stipulates that banks should have adequate systems in place for controlling and reporting of market risk on a daily basis. Section 6 of FI’s general guidelines (FFFS 1999:12) concerning management, internal information and internal control stipulates that the Board of Directors should see to it that there is an information system in place which at all times produces relevant information about the business. Section 4 of the same general guidelines stipulates that policies should be reviewed internally on an on-going basis. FI examines banks information systems, risk management systems and internal control systems through the on-site supervision process. For this purpose inspectors have relevant manuals to conduct their work. Chapter 4 Section 12 of regulation on capital adequacy (FFFS 2000:6) stipulates that positions in the trading book shall be marked to market on a daily basis for measurement of capital charge. Further, Section 9 of FI’s general guideline (FFFS 2000:10) concerning management of market- and liquidity risks stipulates that market valuation, made independently of position taking units, should be undertaken on a daily basis for the trading book. The valuation should be based on complete, precise and updated information about positions. Banks’ valuation models and data used in the valuations are examined through the on-site supervision process. Relevant manuals are in place to assist inspectors in this work. A bank which has the authorization to use the Internal Models Approach for market risk capital requirements shall perform stress test and on an annual basis evaluate its entire risk management system for market risks according to Chapter 11 Section 4 in FI’s regulation (FFFS 2000:6). Section 8 of general guideline (FFFS 2000:10) also deals with this issue. Banks’ with large and complex exposures should perform gap-analysis, sensitivity analysis etc. It is also stipulated that banks that are using Value at Risk models internally should perform stress test and scenario analysis. In the on-site supervision work FI examines banks stress tests and scenario analysis. The market risk team consists of three persons, each with two to three years of experience at the supervisory authority. Two of the risk analysts have a master degree in financial economics with mathematical emphasis, and the other has a master degree in economics. Two staff members work with capital adequacy questions, and are members of the Models Task Force of the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision. No one of the staff members have a background in the industry. The members of the market risk team also get the opportunity to attend in-house as well as external courses; more recently for example an internal course in financial mathematics with a focus on market and credit risk modeling techniques. Section 5 of FI’s guideline (FFFS 2000:10) on market and liquidity risks stipulates that it is the responsibility of the managing director to secure a balance between the bank’s present business strategy and the level of risk incurred. The managing director’s responsibility is also to have guidelines and regulations issued; to have sufficient resources available for managing and monitoring risks; and to maintain systems and standards for measurement of risk and return, reporting and internal control. Through on-site supervision FI seeks to examine the senior management’s understanding of market risks inherent in business lines/products traded as well as senior management’s understanding of implications of the risk management information. Section 11 of the guideline stipulates that reports to the Board of Directors and the managing director should at least cover risk exposures, limit utilization, returns, results of stress test and back-testing etc. FI examines the quality of management information through the on-site supervision process and also reviews the assumptions used in stress tests scenarios. At present no Swedish bank has authorization to use the Internal Models Approach for market risk capital requirements. Two banks have applied for an authorization and FI is currently in the process of evaluating the models. It is FI’s judgment is that it has the adequate knowledge and skills to evaluate and follow up these models.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	None.
Principle 13.	Other Risks Banking supervisors must be satisfied that banks have in place a comprehensive risk management process (including appropriate board and senior management oversight) to identify, measure, monitor, and control all other material risks and, where appropriate, to hold capital against these risks.
Description	The responsibility of the board and the management of a company are governed by the Companies Act Chapter 8 where it is stipulated that it is the responsibility of the board to make sure that the company is organized in such a way that accounting, management of assets and other financial conditions are be controlled in a safe manner. According to the general guideline regarding control, internal information and internal controls the board shall make sure that the institution has an organization that is appropriate; inter alia the functionality of the institution’s regulations, systems and procedures in the areas of risk control, monitoring and follow-up on risks. The following risks are mentioned in the general guidelines; credit and counterpart risks, market risks, liquidity risks, IT and other technical risks, administrative risks and legal risks. General guidelines related to specific risk areas are the those issued on credit risks (FFFS 1995:49) and market–and liquidity risks (FFFS 2000:10). FI has issued regulation (FFFS 1998:11)on the reporting of interest risk exposures. Through on-site investigations, FI can form an opinion of to what extent the institutions have implemented the general guidelines. FI has drafted internal guidelines used for assessing the different risk areas. The Act on Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures regulates that the minimum requirement of capital to risk-weighted assets is 8 percent for all credit institutions. FI does not have a mandate to prescribe a higher rate of capital coverage. Section 44a of the general guideline on Annual reports in credit institutions and securities companies (FFFS 2000:18) prescribes that the institution has to give an account of the exposures related to financial and other risks, for example operational and legal risks. The institutions do not report to what extent they carry out foreign liquidity transactions and nor the volume of the transactions. In examinations and through the provisions of the general guideline on market–and liquidity risks (FFFS 2000:10) FI addresses the question of currency risks in the management of a bank.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	FI has issued general guidelines on management of market risk and internal controls. FI has no supervisory standards on exchange and operational risk. FI is in the process of giving reporting guidelines concerning liquidity. FI has no powers to require a bank to hold capital against risks other than market and credit risk.
Principle 14.	Internal Control and Audit Banking supervisors must determine that banks have in place internal controls that are adequate for the nature and scale of their business. These should include clear arrangements for delegating authority and responsibility; separation of the functions that involve committing the bank, paying away its funds, and accounting for its assets and liabilities; reconciliation of these processes; safeguarding its assets; and appropriate independent internal or external audit and compliance functions to test adherence to these controls, as well as applicable laws and regulations.
Description	The Companies Act Chapter 8 determines the responsibilities of the Board of Directors concerning organization and administration. The board is responsible for the company’s organization and it has to see to that administrative affairs are properly arranged. Particularly, monitoring of the company’s accounts, the bank’s treasury, and the general economic performance belong to the board. The board shall issue written instructions on the frequency and the type of reporting that is to be delivered to the board. The Act also provides that the responsibilities of the Board of Directors concerning division of duties shall be determined in a working plan. FI’s general guideline concerning control, internal information and internal controls (FFFS 1999:12) determines that it is the board that is responsible for having reliable procedures and information systems in place, in order to maintain internal control but also in order to analyze and evaluate risks. The general guidelines concerning credit risks (FFFS 1995:49) and general guidelines concerning preventive measures of crimes (FFFS 1996:8) also emphasize the importance of internal controls and the responsibility of the board. FI’s guideline 1999:12 states that the board must see to that risk monitoring is arranged in a satisfactory manner. In addition to general guidelines for risk management there must be special instructions for managing and controlling of risks inter alia in the following risk areas: credit and counterparty risk, interest rate, foreign exchange and liquidity risk, IT and other operational risks, and administrative and legal risks. Internal control systems must be built so as to assure correct and complete accounting. Control routines must be established that provide information of deviations from internal guidelines. Security risk pertaining to proprietary information and physical controls must be arranged; IT security must be safeguarded to enable the bank to continue its operations uninterrupted. Sharing of duties and responsibilities must be arranged in a manner that prevents a single person from making independent decisions without outside scrutiny (four eyes principle). The general guideline concerning reports about appointed members of the boards of directors and the senior management (FFFS 1998:13-14) determines that FI has to be provided with information about the members of management. FI has the legal authority to require changes in the composition of the board and management only in connection with an application for banking license. FI does not continuously carry out any investigations in order to make sure that the competence of directors or senior management is satisfactory. As part of on-site inspections, especially concerning internal control systems, FI determines that there is an appropriate balance in the skills and resources between control functions and operative functions. The general guideline FFFS 1999:12 states that all credit institutions shall have an independent audit function. Independent of operative functions, the audit must be subordinated directly to the board or the managing director. In all cases, internal auditors must report to the board. The board shall issue instructions to internal audit as to its duties and reporting procedures. As a part of on-site inspections, especially concerning systems of internal controls, FI examines whether the internal audit function has appropriate independence, sufficient resources, and has the authority to carry through all investigations and to obtain all information that its required to discharge its duties. FI also examines that there are audit plans, work routines and reporting lines in place. By the Swedish banking act FI has the authority to obtain all information that is needed for the supervision. In connection with on-site inspections FI requires reports of the audit function for its perusal. In Section 6 of the general guideline (FFFS 1999:12) it is stated that unless otherwise stipulated information must be reported to FI in the form it is available through the bank’s internal communication system. It is customary that board members are non-executives representing different backgrounds, inter alia major owners of banks.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	FI is not empowered to require a change in the constitution of aboard due to shortcomings in the skills and knowledge of board members.
Principle 15.	Money Laundering Banking supervisors must determine that banks have adequate policies, practices, and procedures in place, including strict “know-your-customer” rules, that promote high ethical and professional standards in the financial sector and prevent the bank being used, intentionally or unintentionally, by criminal elements.
Description	The legal framework for anti-money laundering is provided in the Banking Business Act and the Act on Measures against Money Laundering. Regulations and general guidelines issued by FI which set out requirements on banks regarding inter alia high ethical standards, crime prevention and measures to hinder money laundering are mainly the following:) regulation concerning measures for the prevention of money laundering (FFFS 1999:8), regulation on crime prevention in banking (FFFS 1996:8), guidelines on principles for dealing with ethical issues in institutions under supervision (FFFS 1998:22), guidelines concerning management, internal information and internal controls (FFFS 1999:12), guidelines concerning reporting of incidents of high importance (FFFS 1999:7). The Act and the regulation on the prevention of money laundering pose requirements to banks regarding policies and instructions for customer identification and record keeping. Identity is to be checked on the commencement of a business relationship. Checks are to be made whenever a transaction exceeds SKR 110,000. Banks licensed in another EEA country are exempt from the rule. If there are grounds for assuming that the party is not acting on his own behalf, steps have to be taken to establish the identity of the originating party. A check shall always be made if there are reasons to suspect a case of money laundering. Documents relating to a transaction are to be kept for five years after the business relationship came to an end. FI’s regulation requires banks to have an internal register that can be used by administrating officers as a source of customer information. FI’s regulation states that the scrutiny of transactions should follow the same principles regardless of the fashion a transaction has been initiated. Special vigilance should be observed when scrutinizing transactions with countries where there are difficulties in obtaining information or whose legal system for combating money laundering have serious deficiencies. Sweden participates in the FATF exercise on Non cooperative Countries or Territories, NCCT. Institutions are required to conduct intensified due diligence when dealing with such countries. The FATF “black list” has been submitted to all institutions covered by the Act. FI’s regulation (Section 3) states that it is mandatory to appoint a person with explicit responsibility for ensuring that all relevant anti-money laundering measures (control systems, work routines, reporting procedures, training programs) are implemented and in accordance with legislation, regulations and instructions. The compliance officer must be a member of management. The regulation states that the board or executive management for the bank shall provide instructions on, e.g., the decision making and reporting procedures for suspicious transactions. There are to be checklists and manuals to provide indications of money laundering. Feedback must be given to the originating entity within the bank on whether notification to the FIU (Financial Intelligence Unit) of police has been made. It is recommended that decisions regarding reporting a suspicious transaction to the FIU should be taken in a centralized manner. The bank’s appointed central compliance officer has the responsibility for the implementation and good functioning of the reporting duties. On a daily basis the function often is often delegated to a security unit as part of the tasks that are undertaken by the bank’s security organization. FI does not require the foreign branches of banks to report cases of suspected money laundering. However, according to Section 7 of FI’s guidelines on money laundering, banks should report to FI of cases where local regulations prevent the bank from applying its anti-money laundering policy consistently on a global basis. In the guidelines on incident reporting (FFFS 1999:7) there is a list of incidents including suspicions of internal or external crime which are expected to be reported to FI if the incident is on a level of considerable (negative) importance. There is also the broader reporting duty of the external auditors (the BCCI-directive) which is applicable to crime. External auditors’ reporting duties involve under certain conditions a wide range of suspected crimes including money laundering in accordance with the Companies act (Chapter 10 sections 38-40). The suspected crimes shall be addressed to the prosecutor’s office, but if a bank is involved FI is expected to be notified as well. In the Act on Measures against Money laundering it is stated that bank staff can not be held liable for the reporting of suspicious transactions done in good faith (Section 10). FI conducts both on-site and off-site inspections with the aim to check the compliance of anti-money laundering measures in banks. On-site inspections are conducted in the context of general inspections or with a focus explicitly on anti-money laundering measures and crime prevention/protection. FI has conducted within a year five inspections of anti-money laundering practices in banks; no major shortcomings or grievances have been detected. As a part of the manual for operational risk, the supervisor has drawn up internal guidelines examinations of anti-money laundering practices. Regarding the enforcement powers FI can revert to the measures enumerated under CP 22. Intentional or gross negligent failure to comply with some essential requirements of the Act on Measures against Money Laundering is a criminal offence and punishable with a fine (the Act Section 14). The secrecy Act, Chapter 1 Section 3, limits the extent to which information, which is subject to confidentiality, may be shared with a foreign financial regulator. It also depends on whether criminal proceedings have been initiated or not. FI has entered into MOUs with a number of foreign regulators, where are set out the procedures for information sharing. In the guidelines FFFS 1988:22 there are given recommendations on ethics policies that should cover in detail how to deal with ethical policy issues. Sweden is a member of the Financial Action Task Force and has endorsed and implemented the FATF 40 recommendations. A self assessment exercise done in 2001 shows that Sweden is in full compliance with 26 of the 28 mandatory recommendations. The shortcomings are related to the missing fit and proper tests of new staff involved with anti-money laundering measures and the fact that foreign exchange offices and money transmitting firms are not subject to FI’s supervision. Section 10 of the regulation (FFFS 1999:8) requires banks to have an ongoing training program on matters concerning money laundering. All employees handling matters concerning the Anti Money Laundering Act shall be kept continuously informed of current developments of the field. If FI learns of transactions which may be deemed to point to money laundering it must inform the FIU of the matter. FI is able to share information with the relevant judicial authorities on the conditions outlined in the Secrecy Act (1980:100).
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	The relevant laws and regulations provide the legal and institutional framework for combating money laundering. To supervise the compliance of the laws and to assess efficiency of the measures, in addition to its own examinations, the supervisor relies to a large extent on the work by internal auditors and the information provided by the external auditors appointed by FI.
Principle 16.	On-Site and Off-Site Supervision An effective banking supervisory system should consist of some form of both on-site and off-site supervision.
Description	Supervision is performed as a combination of off-site supervision and on-site supervision. There are also various supervisory approaches ranging from specialized risk analysis to general supervisory activities. By on-site supervision, supervisors verify that internal control systems are in place, risk management methods are sufficient, etc. FI has issued guidance in various areas, which is followed up by on-site supervision. To support supervisors in their examinations and enhance quality, handbooks have been issued on credit risk, market risk, liquidity risk, internal controls, and operational risk. FI appoints auditors to banks who are required to report on compliance in key risk areas, i.e.,. on major deviations from FI’s regulations and guidelines. Internal control systems are to be a key subject for the auditors appointed by FI, especially how the reporting systems safeguard the supervisor receiving accurate information and in compliance with laws and regulations (Chapter 7 Section 5 the Banking Business Act). Prudential reports and statistical returns are analyzed on a regular basis (quarterly, semi-annually months and annually). Reported data from all financial institutions is fed into a specific database (Värdetatabasen). There are internal routines for ensuring that supervisors’ and risk analysts’ attention is drawn to deviations in data regarding capital adequacy (also to down-going trends) and large exposures. This information will then be subject to further risk analysis and examination. In addition to the general analysis of prudential reports, risk analysts have access to the database (Värdetatabasen), where the relevant background analysis data can be found. The database is a base for in-depth risk analyzes on various risk areas. Risk analysts also carry out on-site examinations in order to obtain other necessary information for the analysis. The overall supervisory principles and interaction between the main processes (supervision, financial stability analysis, and regulating and licensing) have been described in an internal paper by FI of March 2000 titled “The New Financial Supervision” (Den nya tillsynen). A detailed description of the supervision process has been made in the document “The Supervision Process” (Tillsynsprocessen) dated in February 2001. The supervision process depends on input from the other main processes. The horizontal cooperation between the main organizational departments (banking, insurance and capital markets) is to be enhanced by the contribution of “group managers” (koncernansvariga) who are responsible for making a risk assessment of the major systemically important groups or entities. The inspections and off-site analyzes of banks are done with the participation of specialists from the different sectional departments and the functional entities within them (risk analysis, legal issues and supervision), as well as from the recently established department for strategy and analysis. The department for strategy and analysis is responsible analyzing the prudential reports from all of the supervised entities, as well as for producing statistical information and, inter alia, for drafting the yearly financial stability report of FI. The group wide risk assessment (riskbedömning) has been defined as the core product of the supervisory process. The assessment is to embrace, inter alia, stress testing, risk diversification, pricing of risk, ownership structure, corporate governance, and capital adequacy. The content and methods of the assessment are yet to be defined in a systematic way. The process will be implemented in the final form in the year 2002. Each of the 13 groups or entities with systemic importance are to be evaluated on a yearly basis. One of the large commercial banks will subject to the first assessment of the prototype of the new model. The supervisory entity within the credit market department is responsible for planning the supervisory process for each banking group. There are three categories of supervisors: general analysts, who analyze prudential reports regularly; specialized risk analysts, who do in-depth analyzes in various risk areas as well as on-site examinations and general supervisors for respective financial sector, whose main task is to carry out on-site examinations. The annual supervision plan is updated every four months. Input to the review comes from a general directive document by the Director General, from results from analyzes, from previous supervision documents, etc. The mix of on-site and off-site supervision may differ between financial groups and companies. The total number of financial institutions and companies subject to supervision amounts to more than 2000. Among them are a number of medium size and small institutions such as savings banks, insurance brokers, small securities firms and very small local insurance companies and others. The frequency of onsite examination is higher with regard to large financial groups and companies. Small companies depend on off-site analyzes to a much higher degree. Sometimes, individual occurrences may give reason for on-site examinations also in small companies. Each such occurrence is, however, evaluated from a risk- and essentiality aspect, in order to determine if an examination should be prioritized. An external consulting agency has been hired to perform quality control on the effectiveness of the risk assessment process. Handbooks on supervisory routines for examiners have been drafted on different subject areas, and the supervisory “products” as defined above have been given definitions. A specified process leader has to make random tests, e.g., of inspection reports to check verify compliance with written procedures. Deviations from internal rules are reported to the owner of the supervision process (chief of department for strategy and analysis). External auditors of the Swedish National Audit Office also make checks on how the supervisor has been able to fulfill its objectives. FI’s supervisors are entitled to get any documentation from the supervised entity, including reports from internal and external auditors. FI appoints auditors in banks in addition to the auditors appointed at banks’ general meetings. The auditors are subject to specific reporting requirements to FI. The risk analysis units at FI specialize on assessing risks in various areas, e.g., credit risk, market risk, liquidity risk and operational risk. The supervisory approach to risk is to look at control environment and routines, risk management, risk measurement (costs for controlling risks, costs for failures, etc.), risk modeling, and pricing and capital allocation to risk. The basic principle in public administration is that documents and information are publicly available. There are, however, secrecy laws, which strictly protects certain information e.g., business relations or information that could damage the company if it was made public. FI has in its guidance (FFFS 1999:12) stated what should be required of internal audit functions regarding independence, competence, and reporting procedures. It is part of the supervisory process to assess compliance with this requirement. Supervisors usually meet with the internal auditors when carrying out on-site inspections.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	FI has a supervision process with defined procedures and responsibilities with on-site and off-site supervision. Due to the newness of the supervision process, some parts of the model for group wide risk assessment have not yet been fully tested. The model is projected to be implemented during 2002.
Principle 17.	Bank Management Contact Banking supervisors must have regular contact with bank management and a thorough understanding of the institution’s operations.
Description	The management of FI has regular meetings, on a quarterly basis, with senior management from the four biggest banks in Sweden. There are also yearly meetings where the annual accounts and other specific issues are discussed with the four banks as well as with some of the other banks. The boards and the management of Swedish banks have a tradition of informally notifying FI whenever changes, structural, strategic etc, are about to take place. The Banking Business Act and the Financing Operations Act require a bank to notify, and in some circumstances also apply for new permit concerning their business activities, e.g., major acquisitions, as well changes in ownership. According to FI guideline (1999:7) incidents that are of major importance to the bank must be reported to FI. This includes crimes against the bank and deliberate as well unintentional mistakes connected to banking activities. Essential economic losses must be connected to such incidents; they must pose a threat to the bank’s vital functions, incidents can or may have lead to serious disruptions, recurring or long cuts in the bank’s services, communications or IT activities; there may be a risk that the bank’s integrity is jeopardized, or several customers or employees are affected. There is a specific general guideline concerning Assessment of Owner/Management (FFFS 1998:14). The persons who are examined are new board members, deputy board members, managing directors and deputy managing directors. The controls consists of management level of education, other education of importance to the position, previous employment during the last ten years, if the person has been sentenced in court and if the person is subject to a preliminary investigation, if the person holds a qualifying amount of shares in the company and if the person has been assessed earlier. FI carries out the assessment by contacting the police and executor authority, checking the register of companies as well as the registration of insiders. If a person is found unfit for the position, FI contacts the bank; however the supervisor has no binding powers to force a resignation of management.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	None
Principle 18.	Off-Site Supervision Banking supervisors must have a means of collecting, reviewing, and analyzing prudential reports and statistical returns from banks on a solo and consolidated basis.
Description	Banks and credit institutions subject to the supervision by FI are required to submit information on their financial condition and performance, at regular intervals. These reports are with the relevant FI regulation or guideline: – Standard report (every 3rd month), information about the balance sheet and the income statement. Further, see below. (FFFS 2000:23) – Large exposures (every 6th month) (FFFS 2000:6) – Solvency ratio and capital adequacy (every 3rd month) (FFFS 2000:6) – Interest rate risk exposure (every 3rd month) (FFFS 1998:11) – Qualified owners and subsidiaries (yearly), (FFFS 2000:7) – Possession of investment shares (yearly), (FFFS 2000:6) – Derivative statistics (every 6th month), (FFFS 1998:7) The reports are, with a few exceptions, submitted on both a solo and consolidated basis. Financial companies in Sweden have to comply with the accounting regulations in the Annual Accounts Act for Credit Institutions and Securities Companies (“ÅRKL,” 1995:1559). The Act is partly an implementation of the Bank Accounting Directive (BAD), 86/635/EEG. ÅRKL, refers to a great extent (mainly related to accounting issues not specific for financial institutions) to paragraphs in the Annual Accounts Act, (1995:1554, “ÅRL”). ÅRL applies to general companies, and is the result of the Swedish implementation of the fourth and 7th EC Company directives on annual accounts and consolidated accounts. According to Chapter 1, Section 5 of ÅRKL, FI has the right to issue binding regulations in the accounting area. FI has issued such regulations and general guidelines as follows: regulations that implement certain parts of the BAD (Bank Accounting Directive), clarifications of ÅRKL (Regulation FFFS 2000:18), and more detailed accounting regulation on accounting for financial instruments (Regulation FFFS 2000:18). The accounting laws provide the legal framework and the more detailed regulation is provided by the binding regulations issued by FI. In the annual financial statements, credit institutions and securities companies have to state whether they comply with the regulations issued by FI. Any deviation must be disclosed and could render a qualified opinion by the auditor. The above-mentioned reports on financial condition and performance are delivered at regular intervals, though with different frequency. The reports must be delivered at a settled date, usually a month after the reporting period. Late reporting, miss reporting, etc, can in serious cases result in the imposition of sanctions, for example withdrawal of a permit, the issue of a warning or a fine according to the Banking Business Act. The sanctions in the Act can be used for misreporting and persistent errors in all kind of reporting, for example reporting connected with the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act. In April 2000 FI issued a warning to a credit institution, which among other things had sent in reports too late at several occasions. Another company was punished in February 2000 by withdrawal of permit, among other things due to its miss reporting. The information submitted includes standardized prudential and statistical reports. The above-mentioned Standard Report consists of a detailed balance sheet and income statement. Specifications in the Standard Report include for instance details concerning on and off-balance sheet activities, problem loans, credit losses, provisioning and details on shareholders’ equity. FI cooperates with Statistics Sweden and Riksbanken regarding financial statistics (guidelines FFFS 1998:19 and FFFS 1999:3). Beyond the reporting of financial condition and performance, on the basis of Chapter 1 Section 11 the Banking Business Act, FI can request information on any other part of a bank group’s activities. However, on the basis of a special situation a company can be granted an exemption from the reporting requirements. The statistical and prudential information reported is taken care of at the Statistical Department. FI has an analytical framework that uses reported information for the ongoing monitoring of the condition and performance of individual banks. The information and analyzes are then spread throughout the whole organization and used for various activities, for example on-site supervision. The information reported is stored in a database. From the database the different departments search for, or order the information they use in their daily work. The database was created in the beginning of the nineties and it is therefore possible to make comparable time series for almost ten years, with a frequency up to three months. Data is collected on a comparable basis and related to the same dates and periods in order to make meaningful comparisons between banking organizations. The dates and periods of the information in the database are commensurate with normal accounting periods: – Dates (stock data): end March, June, September and/or December – Periods (flow data): January to March, January to June, January to September and/or January to December.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	There is no standardized prudential report regarding a credit institution’s liquidity situation; one is scheduled to come in place during 2002.
Principle 19.	Validation of Supervisory Information Banking supervisors must have a means of independent validation of supervisory information either through on-site examinations or use of external auditors.
Description	By on-site supervision, FI endeavors to form a coherent picture of an institution’s risk position. Supervisors verify that internal control systems are in place, risk management methods are sufficient and that laws and regulations are complied with. To support supervisors in their examinations and enhance quality, handbooks have been issued different risk areas. On-site supervision is performed according to a yearly plan that is updated three times a year. An examination must be concluded with a written supervision report. The report must include e.g., a description of shortcomings detected and a remark or admonition to rectify the situation. On-site examinations at the large banks generally require the contribution of three inspectors for three days each. The total time spent on an individual inspection is two to three months. FI performs inspections of the major risk areas in the larger banks with a frequency of every three years. The most important foreign branches of the major banks are visited with a frequency of every four years. The supervisory process regularly involves meetings with auditors in the preparation of on-site examinations. FI has no system of systematically obtaining the reports of a bank’s internal and external auditors. The reports of the internal audit are only requested in connection with FI’s projected examinations. FI appoints auditors to banks who are obliged to report on compliance in key risk areas, i.e., on major deviations from FI’s regulations and guidelines. Internal control systems are a key subject for the auditors appointed by FI, especially how the reporting systems safeguard the supervisor receiving accurate information and in compliance with laws and regulations (Chapter 7 Section 5 the Banking Business Act). On the basis of Chapter 7 Section 5 the Banking Business Act, FI appoints an auditor in a bank in addition to those appointed at the general meeting or shareholders’ meeting. FI’s policy is not to appoint an auditor from a accountant firm from which an auditor has been elected by the general meeting of the bank. The auditor appointed by FI may not without FI’s consent provide consulting services to the bank or an entity closely linked with it. The law requires that at least one of the auditors must be a chartered accountant. FI has the authority to appoint auditors to do specific reviews on its behalf. The Board of Directors of a savings bank or members bank shall immediately notify FI if the auditor does not have the needed qualifications or knowledge or e.g., who is in bankruptcy. In the case of a commercial bank, the case would be referred to a County Administrative Court according to the Companies Act. The quality of the external audit is regularly a part of the examination process by FI. The supervisor has the legal right of full access to all bank records as well as to the board, senior management and staff. According to Chapter 7 Section 6 the Banking Business Act, FI may whenever necessary convene a meeting of the board or an extra general meeting of the bank. Representatives of FI may take part in the deliberations. Periodic examination of auditors’ returns is part of the supervisory work. Auditors appointed by FI have a requirement to report on compliance in key risk areas, i.e., on major deviations from FI’s regulations and guidelines. Internal control systems are to be a key subject for the auditors appointed by FI, especially how the reporting systems safeguard the supervisor receiving accurate information and in compliance with laws and regulations (Section 4, FFFS 1998:5). FI meets at least once a year with management of main banks and financial groups.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	In its regulations FI has increasingly laid stress on the proper arrangements of banks’ internal audit function. The supervisor has connections with external auditors representing the shareowners only through the auditor FI appoints.
Principle 20.	Consolidated Supervision An essential element of banking supervision is the ability of the supervisors to supervise the banking group on a consolidated basis.
Description	FI has entered into MOU with supervisory authorities in most of the countries where Swedish bank groups have subsidiaries. Information on a subsidiary could be achieved directly from the foreign authority concerned. In most cases it is possible for FI to participate in an on-site investigation made by the foreign authority. According to FI‘s regulation FFFS 2000:7, a bank must make a yearly report listing the subsidiaries and other ownership interests as well as branches and representative offices. According to the Banking Business Act Chapter 1 Section 11, if a bank is part of a group, the provisions of the Act and the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act regarding the bank’s business and supervision of the bank shall apply, where applicable, to other companies within the group, including non-financial companies. The limitations imposed on the bank’s business shall also relate to the same companies jointly. Other entities belonging to the group shall provide FI with any information regarding their operations and relevant circumstances which FI requires in order to exercise its supervision of the bank. - Group contributions may only be given by the bank following the consent of FI. According to the Banking Business Act Chapter 7 Section 1, a bank is subject to the supervision of FI and must be registered with FI. The bank must furnish FI with any information regarding its operations and circumstances connected therewith requested by FI. FI may carry out investigations at the bank at any time it considers necessary. If a Swedish bank has taken a decision which is in contravention of the Act or any other legislation which regulates the bank’s operations, or against a regulation issued by virtue of such legislation or against the bank’s articles of association, FI may enjoin the execution of the decision. If possible, FI may order the bank to rescind the decision if it has already been executed. FI is in the process of developing a new model for risk assessment of the financial institutes under supervision based on three parts: key financial ratios based on information from the institutes; market ratios for the public institutes; and risk analysis and evaluation of risk management and controls based on FI’s own findings through examinations. It is FI’s goal to perform the full risk assessment on thirteen institutes or groups of institutes that FI has identified as systemically critical. FI is currently in the process of developing a new approach to the financial strength and risk exposure of supervised institutes. The supervision of bank groups on a consolidated basis is of the highest priority for FI. FI is responsible for the regulations concerning accounting standards for credit institutes and financial conglomerates/financial groups. Accounting regulations apply to both solo level and consolidated groups. In the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act Chapter 6 there is a definition for a financial group. The group includes a credit institution, a securities firm or a financial holding company with subsidiaries that are either credit institutions, securities firms or “financial institutions” (holding companies, securities firms without licenses or currency traders). According to the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposure Act, the prudential rules contained in the law are applied both on a solo level for credit institutions (and securities firms) and on a consolidated basis concerning the financial group. Also companies that provide data services or manage real estate are included in the financial group. FI collects a number of reports regarding parent companies, Swedish subsidiaries, foreign branches and consolidated reports for groups with a bank or a holding company at the top. The reports cover data, e.g., on the balance sheet and the profit and loss accounts, on large exposures and capital adequacy ratios regarding credit and market risks (FFFS regulation 2000:6). Collection of data and analyzes are done both on solo and consolidated basis. The reporting requirements are applied to all institutions on a uniform basis. FI does not have powers to circumscribe the range of activities a bank is entitled to engage in on the basis of the bank’s risk position, inter alia explicit powers to order a foreign branch to be shut down. A bank does need FI’s authorization for acquiring a subsidiary, i.e., a bank’s business. FI does not accord sufficient attention to the issue of efficient host country supervision when processing applications for foreign establishments by local banks. (cf. CP 23). If a bank is part of a group, the legal provisions regarding the bank’s business and supervision of the bank also apply to other undertakings within the group. The limitations imposed on the bank’s business shall relate to the undertakings jointly. Other entities belonging to the group shall provide FI with any information regarding their operations that FI requires in order to exercise its supervision of the bank. If a bank has made a decision in contravention of a banking act, FI may enjoin the execution of the decision. The fit and proper tests of the owners of banks are carried out according to FI’s regulations on the basis of Chapter 7 Section 13 a the Banking Business Act.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	The laws apply to prudential regulation on a consolidated basis; the regulations give the supervisor powers to give prudential rules on a consolidated basis. FI does not, however, have powers to circumscribe the range of activities a bank can engage in, e.g., through its subsidiaries. When assessing an application for a foreign establishment by a Swedish bank FI is not required by law to assess the supervisory arrangements in the host country in order to safeguard efficient supervision on a consolidated basis. In view of the expanding overseas activities of Swedish banks, FI ought to enhance the assessment of the safety and soundness of the banks’ foreign operations. The authority has yet to conclude agreements with some of the countries outside the EU where Swedish banks have established operations. In the case of complex multinational banking groups FI is in the process of defining its role as the lead supervisor.
Principle 21.	Accounting Standards Banking supervisors must be satisfied that each bank maintains adequate records drawn up in accordance with consistent accounting policies and practices that enable the supervisor to obtain a true and fair view of the financial condition of the bank and the profitability of its business, and that the bank publishes on a regular basis financial statements that fairly reflect its condition.
Description	The general guideline concerning control, internal information and internal controls by FI (FFFS 1999:12) determines that it is the board of the institution which is responsible that there be reliable procedures and information systems within the institution in order to maintain internal control but also in order to analyze and evaluate risks. The regulations and general guideline concerning the annual reports of banks (FFFS 2000:18) determine what is required concerning financial record keeping system and the data they should produce, to the public as well as to FI. Should an institution have failed to publish an annual report or/and the annual report has not been audited properly FI would be in a position to revoke the license. The annual report has to be audited as prescribed in law. According to the Annual accounts Act and the Swedish Companies Act it constitutes a crime not to publish an audited annual report. If the bank does not deliver an annual and audited report within eleven months since the ending of the financial year the bank will be compulsorily liquidated. The auditors’ tasks are defined in the Swedish Companies Act Chapter 10 sections 3-6. The auditor examines the annual report and the accounting records as well as the administration of the Board of Directors and the managing director. The audit report attached to the annual accounts must be signed by all auditors, including the one appointed by FI. The auditors appointed by the general meeting of the shareholders and the auditor appointed by FI are responsible for the examination of the accounting records. The auditor appointed by FI files a report according to the general guideline FFFS 1998:5. The auditor has to make a report within three weeks of completing the auditing of the annual accounts. Among others it must include notes on major shortcomings in the bank’s internal control systems, accounting and administration, as well as an account of on discrepancies from FI’s regulations and guidelines. FI has issued regulation concerning the annual reports of banks (FFFS 2000:18). Banks also have to follow the Annual accounts Act of credit institutions and securities companies where are implemented the EU’s Bank Accounts Directive. Banks are bound to follow the above and to follow other laws and applying recommendations and statements on accounting matters from other standard setters where appropriate. Banks are required to utilize valuations rules that are consistent, realistic and prudent, taking account of current values where relevant, and that profits are net of appropriate provisions. The Swedish Companies Act and the Annual accounts Act of credit institutions and securities companies as well as the regulations concerning annual reports of banks (FFFS 2000:18), inclusive minimum standards of public disclosure requirements, as well as FI’s guideline 1998:5 for auditors appointed by FI, provide the general framework. But also the recommendations from the Swedish Institute of Authorized Public Accountants (FAR) determine generally accepted auditing standards. The auditors’ reports are not subjected to FI’s approval prior to publishing. In the Secrecy Act, there are provisions on what type of information is to be treated as confidential and to which authorities and other bodies such information can be divulged to. Swedish banks have to produce annual audited financial statements according to the Annual accounts Act of credit institutions and securities companies. The Swedish Companies Act requires that the auditor examine the company’s annual report and the accounting records as well as the administration of the Board of Directors and the managing director. The examination should be performed in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards. The Swedish Institute of Authorized Public Accountants determines generally accepted auditing standards. The standards comply substantially with internationally accepted auditing standards. FI is required by law (Chapter 7 Section 5 Banking Business Act) to appoint additional auditors to perform the same examination as the auditors appointed by the general meeting of the shareholders. Auditors appointed by FI examine issues according to instructions from the supervisory authority. The auditor appointed by FI may not represent the same auditing firm as the auditor appointed by the bank’s general meeting. Furthermore banks are to follow the Bookkeeping Act that contains regulations on bookkeeping and retaining of accounting records. The banks should follow the recommendations issued by the Swedish Accounting Standards Board (Bokföringsnämnden), which was founded to interpret the Bookkeeping Act as well as generally accepted accounting principles as stipulated by the Act. Where appropriate, banks should also apply the recommendations and statements on accounting matters from the Swedish Financial Accounting Standards Council (Redovisningsrådet), which is the body in Sweden assigned to implement the accounting standards issued by the International Accounting Standards Council, IASC. The work is under progress and so far about 20 recommendations have been issued. FI has no powers to revoke the auditors appointed by the general meeting of shareholders. FI can instead revoke the appointment of the auditor referred in Chapter 7 Section 5 the Banking Business Act. FI conducts its supervision both with its own examination staff as well as external auditors, including the one appointed by it according to the Banking Business Act. Banks have to produce interim statements at least once a year according to the Annual Accounts Act of credit institutions and securities companies. The law states also the minimum requirements of what the interim statement should include and when the interim statements should be issued. FI’s regulations and general guidelines (FFFS 2000:18) provide further details on fundamental regulations, rules on valuation and disclosures to be applied when preparing the interim statement. The banks that are listed on the stock exchange are to prepare interim statements quarterly. The auditor has to report immediately to FI if he becomes aware of circumstances which may constitute a significant breach of the legislation which regulates the operations of banks; may have a negative effect upon the bank’s future operations; or may lead to the auditor advising against the adoption of the balance sheet or profit and loss account or to qualification in accordance with the Companies Act. The auditor must similarly report to FI of any of his findings that concern the bank’s parent undertaking or subsidiaries, or an undertaking which has a similar relation to the bank. The reporting requirements of the auditor appointed by FI are stipulated in FI`s guideline (FFFS 1998:5). FI has also issued a general guideline concerning reporting of significant events (FFFS 1999:7) according to which the management of the bank has to file a report to the supervisor within a period of four weeks. The guideline 1998:5 states also that the auditor appointed by FI shall on a continuous basis report to FI on such findings that may be of significance to FI for its supervisory purposes. The auditor must also report to FI of any written complaint addressed to the board of a bank.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	The supervisor has no powers to revoke the appointment of an auditor elected by the shareholders’ meeting. FI shall appoint (and discharge) a special auditor whose functions are partly dictated by FI’s guidelines and who must furnish special reports to FI.
Principle 22.	Remedial Measures Banking supervisors must have at their disposal adequate supervisory measures to bring about timely corrective action when banks fail to meet prudential requirements (such as minimum capital adequacy ratios), when there are regulatory violations, or where depositors are threatened in any other way. In extreme circumstances, this should include the ability to revoke the banking license or recommend its revocation.
Description	According to Chapter 7 (passage titled “Intervention against banks”) of the Banking Business Act FI has the authority to take remedial action against banks. Where a Swedish bank has taken a decision which is in contravention of this Act or any other legislation which regulates the bank’s operations, or against a regulation issued by virtue of such legislation or against the bank’s articles of association, FI may enjoin the execution of the decision. Where the decision has already been executed, the supervisory authority may order the bank to rescind the decision, where possible. A Swedish bank’s charter shall be revoked in the following circumstances. In the cases below marked 4 and 5, a warning may be issued instead of revocation if that is deemed to be sufficient. 1. the bank has not submitted an application for registration within the prescribed period or the application has been withdrawn or cancelled as a result of a decision which has become final; 2. the bank has not commenced banking operations within one year after the grant of the charter or the bank, prior thereto, has declared that it will not be utilizing the charter; 3. the bank has transferred its entire business; 4. the bank has not conducted banking operations during a continuous period of six months; 5. the bank, as a result of the breach of a provision referred to in Section 15 or in any other manner, has proved itself to be unsuitable to exercise such operations to which the charter relates; 6. the commercial bank’s capital base is less than five million euro and the deficiency has not been covered within three months from the discovery of the deficiency by the bank (similar requirements are set forth in the acts regulating savings banks, and member banks; 7. the bank has failed to fulfill its obligations in accordance with the Deposit Guarantees Act and has not undertaken rectification within one year from such time as FI ordered the bank to comply with its obligations with a warning that the bank’s charter may be revoked; or 8. any person who is a member of the commercial bank’s Board of Directors, or its managing director, or the acting managing director does not possess sufficient insight and experience in order to participate in the management of a bank and is otherwise not suitable for such a task. The commercial bank’s charter shall also be revoked where it may be assumed that any such person has failed, to a significant extent, to comply with his obligations in commercial operations or in other financial affairs or has been convicted of serious criminal offences (similar requirements are set forth in the acts regulating savings banks and member banks). Revocation of charters and the issuance of warnings are decided upon by FI. The government shall determine cases of exceptional importance. FI’s Director General has the discretion to refer a case for governmental decision making. Where a special cause exists, FI may grant an extension to cover the deficiency in the bank’s capital base. In the cases where e.g., the managing director has been found unsuitable for his position, the charter may only be revoked where FI has taken a decision to complain about the person and that he or she, following a specified period determined by FI, remains in the position. Where the charter is revoked, the governmental authority, which decided to revoke the charter, may determine the manner in which the winding up of the business shall take place. An injunction against future operations may be ordered together with a decision in respect of revocation. Where FI is informed by a competent governmental authority in another country within the EEA of the fact that a Swedish bank has violated the laws of that country, the measures of injunction and warning may be taken against the bank. FI shall inform the competent governmental authority in the other country of the measures undertaken. When a banking undertaking which is domiciled in a country outside the EEA conducts banking operations from branch offices in Sweden and, in such context, breaches a provision as referred to in Section 15 the Banking Business Act or in any other manner proves itself to be unsuitable to conduct banking operations, the branch office’s license shall be revoked or a warning shall be issued if such is deemed to be sufficient. Issues regarding revocation of branch office licenses and the issuance of warnings shall be determined by FI. The government shall determine cases of principle or of exceptional importance. Where deposits at the branch office are covered by a guarantee as a result of a decision in accordance with the Deposit Guarantees Act, FI may, in the event that the bank fails to fulfill its obligations in accordance with the Deposit Guarantees Act, order the bank to undertake rectification with a warning that the branch office’s license will otherwise be revoked. The license may be revoked in the event that rectification has not been undertaken within one year from the date of the order. FI shall inform the supervisory authority in the country where the banking undertaking has its registered head office of the measures undertaken. If a bank domiciled in a country within the EEA conducts operations in Sweden through a branch or by direct provision of services and breaches a legal provision or in any other manner proves itself to be unsuitable to conduct such operations, FI may order the bank to effect rectification. Where the bank fails to comply with the order, FI shall inform the competent governmental authority in the bank’s home country. Where rectification is not effected notwithstanding FI’s order, FI may enjoin the foreign bank from assuming further obligations in Sweden. Prior to the issuance of the injunction, FI shall inform the home country supervisor. In urgent cases, FI may issue the injunction without prior notification to the home country authority. If the operating license of a bank domiciled in another country within the EEA conducts operations in Sweden has been revoked in its home country, FI shall immediately enjoin the bank from entering into further obligations in Sweden. According to Section 23 the Banking Business Act, FI may issue orders or injunctions in accordance with the provisions in the Act on pain of a conditional fine. FI has also the authority to take remedial actions against banks with the support of Chapter 7 of the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act [lag om kapitaltäckning och stora exponeringar för kreditinstitut och värdepappersbolag]. If a bank or a financial group of undertakings: 1. has a capital base which is less than the minimum amount required pursuant to Chapter 2, (8 percent); 2. fails to fulfill the requirements with respect to systems and routines related to registration and classification of credit risks, supervision and verification of market risks and large exposures and interest risks in its operations in their entirety; and calculation of the institution’s or the financial group’s financial positions; and 3. fails to reduce its large exposures to the permitted levels. FI shall order the institution or the undertaking in a financial group of undertakings which must prepare the group-based accounting to take appropriate measures in order to rectify the situation. According to Chapter 7 Section 15, the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act, when FI issues injunctions pursuant to this Act, it may also make such orders subject to conditional fines. The supervisor can not impose penalties for non-compliance, it can only set conditional fines. The supervisor can not restrict or suspend payments to shareholders or share-repurchases, make decisions barring individuals from banking or replace managers, directors or controlling owners or restrict their powers. No arrangements for a take-over by or a merger with a healthier institution can be imposed on a bank. Nor is it possible to impose conservatorship on an ailing bank. FI cannot either impose restrictions on the current activities of the bank or on asset transfers from the bank. The supervisor cannot apply penalties and sanctions to the management and/or the Board of Directors of the bank. There are no laws or regulations that mitigate against the supervisor delaying appropriate corrective actions. However, criminal law concerning civil servants can be said to oblige the supervisor to act promptly when there is a clear need of corrective action. Failure to do so can render responsibility under Chapter 20 Section 1 of the Penal Code for breach of duty or under Section 14 of the Act on Employment in the Public Sector for professional misconduct.
Assessment	MATERIALLY NON-Compliant
Comments	The supervisor has a limited range of remedial actions available; in addition to issuing warnings and imposing conditional fines, the supervisor can revoke the license. However, the supervisor should be able to take a more proactive approach with respect to remedial measures. The Committee on Banking Law has in 1998 proposed some amendments and additions to the powers of FI in order to broaden the range of remedial actions. The proposals include inter alia a possibility to communicate formal complaints (erinran) and to broaden the scope of issuing warnings. The supervisor is not empowered to take most of the measures enumerated in the essential criteria, e.g., restricting the scope of activities of a bank and suspending the payment of dividends. There are no laws or regulations that would militate against supervisory forbearance.
Principle 23.	Globally Consolidated Supervision Banking supervisors must practice global consolidated supervision over their internationally active banking organizations, adequately monitoring and applying appropriate prudential norms to all aspects of the business conducted by these banking organizations worldwide, primarily at their foreign branches, joint ventures, and subsidiaries.
Description	According to the Banking Business Act, a bank must furnish FI with any information regarding its operations and circumstances connected therewith requested by FI. FI may carry out investigations at the bank at such times as the supervisory authority considers necessary. Rules governing financial groups are to be found in Chapter 6 and 7 of the Capital Adequacy and Large Exposures Act and in Chapter 14 of the Regulations and general guidelines issued by FI concerning capital adequacy and large exposures, FFFS 2000:6. According Chapter 7 Section 2, FI shall exercise supervision over a financial group of undertakings where the parent undertaking, or an undertaking in the group which holds an ownership interest, is an institution domiciled in Sweden. Where the parent undertaking in a financial group of undertakings is a holding company with financial operations, FI shall exercise supervision where (1) there are no foreign undertakings equivalent to institutions in the group of undertakings, or (2) the holding undertaking is domiciled in Sweden and at least one subsidiary undertaking is an institution. FI shall, within the scope of its authority, upon request from the competent authority in another country within the EEA, submit or verify information necessary in order for the foreign authority to exercise its supervision or also permit such authority to perform the verification itself. To the extent prescribed in the act or relevant regulations, a financial group of undertakings shall submit information in a special report covering the group’s total financial position (group-based accounting). An undertaking included in a financial group of undertakings and other subsidiary undertakings of an institution or a holding undertaking with financial operations, and subsidiary undertakings to a holding undertaking with diversified operations, shall submit information which is required by the undertaking responsible for preparing the reports on group-based accounting or total information. FI may grant an exclusion to a subsidiary or an undertaking with an ownership interest from the obligation to submit a supervisory report where 1) the undertaking is located in a country outside the EEA where there exist legal impediments to the transfer of necessary information; (2) the undertaking is of minor significance in relation to the purpose of the supervision; or (3) a summary of the undertaking’s financial position would be inappropriate or misleading taking into consideration the purpose of the supervision. Where a subsidiary undertaking which is an institution is exempt from supervisory reporting obligation the parent undertaking shall submit to FI any information necessary for FI to exercise its supervision over the institution. FI’s general guidelines on internal controls and risk management all apply to the foreign entities of Swedish banks. FI regularly collects consolidated reports and makes on-site examinations regarding locally incorporated banks and their foreign establishments. The focus of the on-site examinations has especially been how the foreign establishments control and follow up market risks in their business. On-site examinations at major banks’ head offices include examinations of the management’s responsibility and role concerning its engagement of the handling of market risks, such as risk- and results reporting, at the bank’s foreign establishments. In connection with on-site examinations at banks’ foreign establishments, emphasis is laid on how local management performs its control functions and monitors of e.g., market risks. An examination of the foreign establishment’s manager is also made with regard to how his job description conforms with his mandate. It is also investigated during on-site examinations if and to what extent the banks foreign establishments comply with laws and regulations (both internal and external as well as those of the home and host country). FI does not have the legal authority to require closing of overseas offices or imposing limitations on their activities. As a last resort, if the activities of the foreign establishments threaten the parent bank’s sound business operations, FI can issue a warning or in extreme circumstances revoke the bank’s license. On-site examinations at major banks’ head offices include examinations of the management’s responsibility and role concerning its engagement in the handling of market risks, including risk reporting and performance, at the bank’s foreign establishments. As the home country authority FI has the main supervisory responsibility for a foreign branch of a Swedish bank located in a country within the EEA. Considerations relating to essence and risk are the starting points for FI’s planning for operative supervision. On-site examinations at the major banks foreign establishments are conducted according to inspection programs laid down by FI. At the on-site examinations it is mandatory to visit the local supervisors before and/or after the examination. The local supervisors are informed about observations and assessments and there is also an exchange of information and discussions about current questions regarding supervision, regulation and practice. FI does not assess the quality of supervision conducted in the countries in which its banks have material operations in a systematic way. According to the Banking Business Act a bank may, pursuant to a license from FI establish a branch office in a country outside of the EEA. A license must be granted where the intended business may be assumed to fulfill the requirements of a sound banking operation. The application must include information about the country in which the branch office is to be established and the address of the branch office and the names of the responsible management.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	FI performs the supervision of banks on a global consolidated basis. The supervisor is not though empowered to prevent the establishment of branches in jurisdictions where the local supervisory arrangements are not adequate to the risks involved in the operations. FI has to take into consideration the preconditions of a sound banking operation. FI also lack powers to require the closing of overseas offices or limitations on their scope of activities.
Principle 24.	Host Country Supervision A key component of consolidated supervision is establishing contact and information exchange with the various other supervisors involved, primarily host country supervisory authorities.
Description	Within the EU Sweden has concluded MOU’s (memoranda of understanding) with all countries in which a Swedish bank is established and vice versa. A specific MOU concerning the supervision of the Nordea group has been concluded the supervisory authorities of Denmark, Finland, and Norway. On-site inspections have been carried out at a number of locations whether within or outside the EU. Outside the EU FI has, when necessary, established contacts and possibilities to exchange information to fulfill its consolidated supervision. There is a MOU concluded with Latvia. Efforts are being made to conclude MOU’s with the United States of America, Poland, Estonia, and Lithuania. The law does not specifically enable FI to prohibit a bank or its affiliates from establishing operations in countries where laws and regulations prohibit exchange of information necessary for supervisory purposes. Chapter 2 Section 5 the Banking Business Act, though provides that a bank may be authorized by FI to acquire another bank’s business, i.e., acquiring a subsidiary, only on the condition that the acquisition is not deemed to be prejudicial to the public interest. According to Chapter 7 Section 17 the Banking Business Act, when FI is informed by a competent governmental authority in another country within the EEA of the fact that a Swedish bank has violated the laws of that country, FI may enjoin the execution of the decision by the bank, or it can revoke the license or issue a warning. FI shall inform the competent governmental authority in the other country of the measures undertaken. According to the MOU on the supervision of Nordea, exchange of information between the supervisory authorities takes place on e.g., the following subject areas: the group’s financial standing, information on intra-group transactions, information on different risk areas, reports on matters of major importance produced by the authorities, reports on completed on-site inspections, circumstances affecting the markets in which the group operates, substantial changes in the activities of the Nordea group, changes in the group’s management or ownership structure, information collected and processed by the authorities, e.g., the critical assessments, and new legislation including regulations or equivalent provisions in the countries concerned.
Assessment	Largely Compliant
Comments	FI has entered into MOU’s with several foreign supervisory authorities. The authority has yet to conclude agreements with some of the countries outside the EEA where Swedish banks have established operations. Referring to the public interest, FI can on the basis of the Banking Business Act deny authorization for the acquisition of a foreign banking firm but it cannot deny a license for a branch outside the EEA on the grounds that the free flow of supervisory information is hindered by local laws or regulations.
Principle 25.	Supervision Over Foreign Banks’ Establishments Banking supervisors must require the local operations of foreign banks to be conducted with the same high standards as are required of domestic institutions and must have powers to share information needed by the home country supervisors of those banks for the purpose of carrying out consolidated supervision.
Description	Rules governing local operations of foreign banks are in the Banking Business Act. According to Chapter 1 Section 4, a foreign banking undertaking may conduct banking business via branch offices having been granted a license to do so; or following notification to FI, conduct operations which primarily relate to representation and brokering of banking services from offices or other permanent establishments (representative offices). A license for the establishment of a branch office in issued by FI. The government shall determine cases involving matters of crucial importance or of exceptional significance. A license for the establishment of a branch office shall be granted where: 1. the planned business may be assumed to fulfill the requirements of a sound banking operation; and 2. deposits with the branch office are covered by the guarantee in accordance with the Deposit Guarantees Act, or by a foreign guarantee which covers deposits as referred to in Section 2 of the Deposit Guarantees Act and which have a maximum compensation level of not less than an amount corresponding to 20,000 Euro prior to any deductions, where applicable, for excess in an amount not exceeding 10 percent of an individual depositor’s guaranteed deposit. A license may not be denied on the basis that no further banks are required. A license is not required for banking undertakings domiciled in a country within the EEA. Such undertakings may: 1. conduct banking business via branch offices in Sweden commencing two months following receipt of notification by FI from the home country authority; and 2. conduct banking operations by offering and providing services from its home country after FI receives notification from a competent governmental authority A foreign bank is permitted to engage in the activities enumerated in Chapter 2 Section 2 the Banking Business Act (see CP 2). A foreign banking undertaking may conduct operations referred to in Section 2 only to the extent such operations are covered by the bank’s license to conduct operations in the country in which the undertaking maintains its registered office. With special reference to provisions regarding supervision of branch offices of foreign banking undertakings domiciled within the EEA FI exercises supervision in cooperation with the competent governmental authority in the home country to ensure that the liquidity of the branch office established in Sweden is satisfactory. The branches of foreign banks must submit to FI a profit and loss account four times a year. Following notification to FI, a competent governmental authority in another country within the EEA may undertake investigations at a branch office established in Sweden of a banking undertaking domiciled in the other country. As to foreign banks domiciled within the EEA which conduct operations in via branch offices or through the direct provision of services, FI shall provide any information to the competent governmental authority in the bank’s home country which such authority requires for its supervisory purposes. FI may issue orders or injunctions in accordance on pain of a conditional fine for both local and foreign establishments. The same standards are applied. If a bank which is authorized in Sweden at the same time is a subsidiary to a foreign company with which it is consolidated in the home country FI needs to apply the rules on ownership control in an international context as well as needs to make an assessment whether the bank is an integral part of a financial group that is difficult to survey and hence is complicated to supervise. (Chapter 9 Section 3). If the home country supervisor practices consolidated supervision it is taken into consideration in the process. The law does not, however, require FI to determine that the home supervisor has given its approval for the establishment of a subsidiary in Sweden. FI can share information with a supervisory authority in another country according to Chapter 14 Section 2 the Secrecy Act. There are disclosure requirements contained in the MOU’s. Chapter 7 Section 9 of the Banking Business Act specifically allows FI to share information with a home country authority within the EEA. Following notification to FI, a competent governmental authority in another country within the EEA may undertake investigations at a branch set up in Sweden by a bank domiciled in the other country. Where a banking undertaking which is domiciled in a country outside the EEA conducts banking operations from a branch in Sweden and breaches a legal provision or in any other manner proves itself to be unsuitable to conduct banking operations, the branch office’s license shall be revoked or a warning shall be issued if such is deemed to be sufficient. Where deposits at the branch office are covered by a guarantee in accordance with the Deposit Guarantees Act, FI may, in the event that the banking undertaking fails to fulfill its obligations in accordance with the Deposit Guarantees Act, order the bank to undertake rectification with a warning that the branch office’s license will otherwise be revoked. The license may be revoked in the event that the banking undertaking has not undertaken the rectification within one year from the date of the order. FI shall inform the supervisory authority in the country where the banking undertaking has its registered office of the measures undertaken. When a bank domiciled in another country within the EEA conducts operations in Sweden via branch offices or through the direct provision of services and, in such context, breaches a legal provision or in any other manner proves itself to be unsuitable to conduct such operations, FI may order the bank to effect rectification. If the bank fails to comply with the order, FI shall inform the competent governmental authority in the undertaking’s home country. Where rectification is not effected, FI may enjoin the bank from assuming further obligations in Sweden. Prior to the issuance of the injunction, FI shall inform the competent governmental authority in the banking undertaking’s home country. If the operating license of a bank domiciled in another country within the EEA and conducting operations in Sweden via branch offices or through the direct provision of services has been revoked in its home country, FI shall immediately enjoin the banking undertaking from entering into further obligations in Sweden. FI as host country supervisor obtains information through the procedures established in MOU’s, as well as bilateral meetings and informal contacts. FI finds that the information obtained fulfills its requirements as to relevance and reliability.
Assessment	Compliant
Comments	The local entities of foreign banks are supervised by FI in cooperation with the respective foreign authorities. The law does not state that the host supervisor needs to determine that approval (or no objection) from the home supervisor has been received for a foreign establishment. In the context of ownership control the FI does consult the foreign authority.

Table 2.

Summary Compliance of the Basel Core Principles

^1/C: Compliant.

^2/LC: Largely compliant.

^3/MNC: Materially non-compliant.

^4/NC: Non-compliant.

^5/NA: Not applicable.

Table 2.

Summary Compliance of the Basel Core Principles

Core Principle	C1/	LC2/	MNC 3/	NC4/	NA5/
1. Objectives, Autonomy, Powers, and Resources	X
1.1 Objectives	X
1.2 Independence		X
1.3 Legal framework	X
1.4 Enforcement powers	X
1.5 Legal protection	X
1.6 Information sharing	X
2. Permissible Activities	X
3. Licensing Criteria		X
4. Ownership	X
5. Investment Criteria	X
6. Capital Adequacy	X
7. Credit Policies	X
8. Loan Evaluation and Loan-Loss Provisioning		X
9. Large Exposure Limits		X
10. Connected Lending		X
11. Country Risk		X
12. Market Risks	X
13. Other Risks		X
14. Internal Control and Audit		X
15. Money Laundering	X
16. On-Site and Off-Site Supervision	X
17. Bank Management Contact	X
18. Off-Site Supervision	X
19. Validation of Supervisory Information	X
20. Consolidated Supervision		X
21. Accounting Standards	X
22. Remedial Measures			X
23. Globally Consolidated Supervision		X
24. Host Country Supervision		X
25. Supervision Over Foreign Banks’ Establishments	X

^1/C: Compliant.

^2/LC: Largely compliant.

^3/MNC: Materially non-compliant.

^4/NC: Non-compliant.

^5/NA: Not applicable.

View Table

Table 2.

Summary Compliance of the Basel Core Principles

Core Principle	C1/	LC2/	MNC 3/	NC4/	NA5/
1. Objectives, Autonomy, Powers, and Resources	X
1.1 Objectives	X
1.2 Independence		X
1.3 Legal framework	X
1.4 Enforcement powers	X
1.5 Legal protection	X
1.6 Information sharing	X
2. Permissible Activities	X
3. Licensing Criteria		X
4. Ownership	X
5. Investment Criteria	X
6. Capital Adequacy	X
7. Credit Policies	X
8. Loan Evaluation and Loan-Loss Provisioning		X
9. Large Exposure Limits		X
10. Connected Lending		X
11. Country Risk		X
12. Market Risks	X
13. Other Risks		X
14. Internal Control and Audit		X
15. Money Laundering	X
16. On-Site and Off-Site Supervision	X
17. Bank Management Contact	X
18. Off-Site Supervision	X
19. Validation of Supervisory Information	X
20. Consolidated Supervision		X
21. Accounting Standards	X
22. Remedial Measures			X
23. Globally Consolidated Supervision		X
24. Host Country Supervision		X
25. Supervision Over Foreign Banks’ Establishments	X

^1/C: Compliant.

^2/LC: Largely compliant.

^3/MNC: Materially non-compliant.

^4/NC: Non-compliant.

^5/NA: Not applicable.

E. Recommended action plan and authorities’ response to the assessment

Recommended action plan

Table 3.

Recommended Action Plan to Improve Compliance of the Basel Core Principles

Table 3.

Recommended Action Plan to Improve Compliance of the Basel Core Principles

Reference Principle	Recommended Action
Objectives, Autonomy, Powers, and Resources (CP 1)	To improve its capacity to supervise particularly the more complex activities of banks, e.g., related to market risks, the supervisor has to be able to increase its competitiveness as an employer. The growing role of the complex multinational banking groups has posed FI with new challenges. In the case of Nordea, especially, FI has to redefine its role as the lead supervisor.
Licensing criteria (CP 3)	The fit and proper tests ought to be applied to all the members of a bank’s management, e.g., also to senior executives and managers of foreign offices. The licensing criteria should also be There are no detailed criteria for assessing the suitability of management. The economic situation of the principal shareholders is assessed only through public financial statements.
Loan evaluation and loan-loss provisioning (CP 8)	The supervisor should be given legally based powers to require a bank to strengthen its lending practices, level of provisions and reserves. Depending on the level of problem assets, the supervisor should have binding powers to make a bank adopt policies that will affect the overall financial strength
Large exposures (CP 9)	FI needs to require reporting on geographical concentrations in its lending.
Connected lending (CP 10)	Supervision of connected lending ought to be enhanced by giving FI the authority to set individual limits to connected lending and deduct such loans extended on concessionary grounds from the bank’s capital. Being authorized to do so in law, FI has yet to issue regulations on the more detailed contents of the register of connected lending that has to be kept in a bank. Arrangements should be for regular reporting to the supervisor on connected lending on an individual or aggregate basis.
Country risk (CP 11)	FI should issue regulations on the management of country risk. FI currently relies largely on quarterly reports on bank country risk exposures prepared by Riksbank.
Other risks (CP 13)	FI should issue supervisory standards on exchange and operational risk. FI ought to be given powers to require a bank to hold capital against risks other than market and credit risk.
Internal Control and Audit (CP 14)	FI should be legally empowered to require a change in the constitution of a board due to shortcomings in the skills and knowledge of board members.
Consolidated Supervision (CP 20)	FI should be empowered to circumscribe the range of activities a bank can engage in through its foreign operations. FI ought to adopt the policy of actively assessing the supervisory arrangements in the host country in order to safeguard efficient home country supervision. The authority has yet to conclude agreements with some of the countries outside the EU where Swedish banks have established operations. In the supervision of complex multinational banking groups FI should adopt the active role of the lead supervisor in the context of coordinating the planning and performing of joint examinations by supervisors from different jurisdictions. In connection with major foreign acquisitions by banks FI has to adopt the policy of consistently assessing the safety and soundness of the bank’s overseas operations.
Remedial Measures (CP 22)	The supervisor ought to be given a wider array of legally binding measures to take a more proactive approach in order to prevent situations from arising where the only effective measure would be revocation of license. The appropriate laws should also be amended to give the supervisor powers to take those measures enumerated in the essential criteria of the principle. The laws should include provisions that would explicitly prevent the possibility of supervisory forbearance.
Globally Consolidated Supervision (CP 23)	The supervisor ought to be empowered to prevent the establishment of branches in jurisdictions where the local supervisory arrangements are not adequate to the risk involved in the operations. FI also lacks powers to require the closing of overseas offices or limitations on the scope of activities.
Host Country Supervision (CP 24)	FI has yet to conclude agreements on cooperation with supervisors from some of the countries where Swedish banks have established operations. FI cannot deny a license for a foreign branch on the grounds that the free flow of supervisory information is hindered by local laws or regulations.
Supervision Over Foreign Banks’ Establishments (25)	The supervisor, as a licensing authority for the establishment of a foreign bank’s offices, ought to be required to assess whether the home country supervisor practices effective consolidated global supervision. The law does not state that the host supervisor needs to determine that approval (or no objection) from the home supervisor has been received for a foreign establishment.

View Table

Table 3.

Recommended Action Plan to Improve Compliance of the Basel Core Principles

Reference Principle	Recommended Action
Objectives, Autonomy, Powers, and Resources (CP 1)	To improve its capacity to supervise particularly the more complex activities of banks, e.g., related to market risks, the supervisor has to be able to increase its competitiveness as an employer. The growing role of the complex multinational banking groups has posed FI with new challenges. In the case of Nordea, especially, FI has to redefine its role as the lead supervisor.
Licensing criteria (CP 3)	The fit and proper tests ought to be applied to all the members of a bank’s management, e.g., also to senior executives and managers of foreign offices. The licensing criteria should also be There are no detailed criteria for assessing the suitability of management. The economic situation of the principal shareholders is assessed only through public financial statements.
Loan evaluation and loan-loss provisioning (CP 8)	The supervisor should be given legally based powers to require a bank to strengthen its lending practices, level of provisions and reserves. Depending on the level of problem assets, the supervisor should have binding powers to make a bank adopt policies that will affect the overall financial strength
Large exposures (CP 9)	FI needs to require reporting on geographical concentrations in its lending.
Connected lending (CP 10)	Supervision of connected lending ought to be enhanced by giving FI the authority to set individual limits to connected lending and deduct such loans extended on concessionary grounds from the bank’s capital. Being authorized to do so in law, FI has yet to issue regulations on the more detailed contents of the register of connected lending that has to be kept in a bank. Arrangements should be for regular reporting to the supervisor on connected lending on an individual or aggregate basis.
Country risk (CP 11)	FI should issue regulations on the management of country risk. FI currently relies largely on quarterly reports on bank country risk exposures prepared by Riksbank.
Other risks (CP 13)	FI should issue supervisory standards on exchange and operational risk. FI ought to be given powers to require a bank to hold capital against risks other than market and credit risk.
Internal Control and Audit (CP 14)	FI should be legally empowered to require a change in the constitution of a board due to shortcomings in the skills and knowledge of board members.
Consolidated Supervision (CP 20)	FI should be empowered to circumscribe the range of activities a bank can engage in through its foreign operations. FI ought to adopt the policy of actively assessing the supervisory arrangements in the host country in order to safeguard efficient home country supervision. The authority has yet to conclude agreements with some of the countries outside the EU where Swedish banks have established operations. In the supervision of complex multinational banking groups FI should adopt the active role of the lead supervisor in the context of coordinating the planning and performing of joint examinations by supervisors from different jurisdictions. In connection with major foreign acquisitions by banks FI has to adopt the policy of consistently assessing the safety and soundness of the bank’s overseas operations.
Remedial Measures (CP 22)	The supervisor ought to be given a wider array of legally binding measures to take a more proactive approach in order to prevent situations from arising where the only effective measure would be revocation of license. The appropriate laws should also be amended to give the supervisor powers to take those measures enumerated in the essential criteria of the principle. The laws should include provisions that would explicitly prevent the possibility of supervisory forbearance.
Globally Consolidated Supervision (CP 23)	The supervisor ought to be empowered to prevent the establishment of branches in jurisdictions where the local supervisory arrangements are not adequate to the risk involved in the operations. FI also lacks powers to require the closing of overseas offices or limitations on the scope of activities.
Host Country Supervision (CP 24)	FI has yet to conclude agreements on cooperation with supervisors from some of the countries where Swedish banks have established operations. FI cannot deny a license for a foreign branch on the grounds that the free flow of supervisory information is hindered by local laws or regulations.
Supervision Over Foreign Banks’ Establishments (25)	The supervisor, as a licensing authority for the establishment of a foreign bank’s offices, ought to be required to assess whether the home country supervisor practices effective consolidated global supervision. The law does not state that the host supervisor needs to determine that approval (or no objection) from the home supervisor has been received for a foreign establishment.

F. Authorities’ Response to the Assessment

14. The authorities are in broad agreement with the mission’s assessment of FI’s observance of the Basel Core Principles for Effective Banking Supervision. FI has asked for substantial budgetary enhancements to address the resource shortcomings noted. A proposal to reform the regulation of banks and credit institutions that would give FI the necessary early intervention powers has been put forward for public comment, with the objective of submitting a bill to parliament by Autumn 2002. The authorities point out that as concerns country risk, FI determines through onsite and offsite inspections that banks policies and procedures are appropriate and adequate.

A. General

15. On July 1, 1991, the Supervisory Service was merged with the supervision of banks and other credit organizations into FI. This merger was accompanied by legal changes that from August 1, 1991, permit financial conglomerates: insurance companies may hold shares in credit institutions and vice versa, and both types of companies may be owned by a holding company, thus forming a financial group.

16. Supervision of insurance companies and of friendly societies (provident and mutual-benefit institutions) is the responsibility of FI, which is an independent State agency. Its work is governed only by legislation and by government Ordinances, which must be published. Final decisions on matters of principle may rest, however, with the government. Administrative courts resolve complaints raised against decisions taken by FI.

17. FI has a total staff of about 170 persons, of which about only 30 (or 18 percent) work in the Department of Insurance and Mutual Funds. This department is divided into three units according to the corresponding area of responsibility: Licensing & Legal Matters, Supervision, and Risk Analysis. The Board of FI settles matters of principles. The Board has the Director General as the chairman and presently the following members: two members of parliament; one representative each from the MoF, the Bank of Sweden, and the National Board for Consumer Policies; three other members with financial and business experience; and two representatives of the employees.

18. There are no permanent advisory bodies. FI is at liberty to turn to independent experts and does use this option from time to time.

19. The International Association of Insurance Supervisors (IAIS) was formed in 1992. Its core objective is “to ensure improved supervision of the insurance industry on a domestic, as well as on an international, level in order to maintain efficient, fair, safe and stable insurance markets for the benefit and protection of policyholders.” As part of this agenda the IAIS develops standards for insurance supervision. These standards emerge from principles that identify the fundamental elements of effective supervision and the areas in which the supervisor should have authority or even have control.

20. Given the major emphasis on stability inherent in the FSAP, this assessment is based on the Insurance Core Principles (CPs) of the IAIS, which focus on prudential supervision, but also address market conduct and cross border issues. The CPs cover 17 key issues. The conclusion is that of 17 assessed principles, Sweden observes 6 principles and broadly observes also 11 principles.

B. Information and Methodology Used for Assessment

21. This FSAP assessment has been undertaken on the basis of (1) a self assessment by FI; (2) discussions with senior FI staff; (3) a review of the key legislation relevant to FI and explanations given of the constitutional framework for government administration in Sweden (the most relevant documents being available only in Swedish); and (4) review of a range of FI publications, including its Annual Report and annual Financial Stability Report, and of its website.¹

22. FI’s self-assessment provided the basis for this FSAP assessment. However, the absence of English translation of the most relevant documents impaired the assessment, causing time-consuming explanations of the Swedish texts by the Swedish colleagues of FI.

C. Institutional and Macroprudential Setting—Overview

23. The supervision concerns only private insurance. Social insurance is administrated by special agencies. Social insurance covers guaranteed and income-related pensions, health insurance and industrial injuries. There are also special arrangements for unemployment insurance. Nevertheless, private insurance plays an important role, which seems to be increasing as some benefits from social insurance are subject to reduction. Employers’ and employees’ associations also have agreed upon benefits, the Second Pillar, supplementing the social insurance cover. This includes pension plans, group life and industrial injuries. Other group and individual insurance arrangements are also widespread.

24. Private insurance is mainly carried out by insurance companies, but there are also some friendly societies. These societies still play a certain, though diminishing role in the sphere of pensions, other life insurance and sickness insurance. They are of different types and sizes, from small local funeral expense funds or sickness funds to nation-wide pension institutions. They are legally different from insurance companies in that they may not act on the market and provide insurance on a commercial basis.

25. An insurance broker is defined as an independent intermediary paid either by commission from the insurance company or by fee from the client. An insurance broker or an insurance broker firm has to be registered and supervised by FI. Insurance brokers must meet certain requirements as regards professional indemnity insurance, professional qualifications and fit- and properness. Brokers are allowed to collect premiums and assist clients in settling claims, but not to administrate such assets. They must inform the client about the commission from the insurer, if the client so requires.

26. It is the duty of FI to ascertain that insurance companies remain solvent and conduct their business in accordance with laws and regulations. Supervision implies consideration of legal, financial, technical and economic matters. As already mentioned, the Swedish legislation has, as far as domestic companies are concerned, laid down the principles of solvency, transparency and good insurance standard.

27. Supervision of the business of a licensed insurance company involves examination of the annual returns which must be submitted to FI before August 1 and, in addition, inspections at the place of business. Some companies have a special auditor appointed by FI (ca. 40 at the moment). Each company, except pure reinsurance companies that do not reinsurance life business or long-term non-life business, must keep a record of the assets covering the technical provisions and follow certain investment regulations.

28. The large nation-wide companies are members of a general federation of insurers, the Swedish Insurance Federation (Sveriges Försäkringsförbund), the objective of which is to deal with matters of common interest to Swedish insurers. The local companies have, on their side, two different but parallel organizations to look after their special interests. In addition, there is an association of general agents of Swedish branches of foreign insurance companies. Since 1994 insurers with licensed agencies or branches in Sweden may, with the consent of the Board, join the Swedish Insurance Federation as members.

29. Insurance brokers have a separate organization.

30. All companies transacting motor liability insurance–domestic companies as well as Swedish branches of foreign companies–are required to be members of the Motor Liability Insurance Association. The main objectives of this association are to take care of matters connected with the insurers’ common responsibility for damage caused by uninsured owners or drivers of vehicles or untraceable drivers that have caused accidents, and to take measures to facilitate insurance arrangements for foreign cars visiting Sweden or Swedish cars going abroad.

31. There are labor market federations for negotiations between insurers on the one hand and employees and employed agents on the other hand.

32. There are several industry organizations for cooperation within the framework of competition legislation or for more general contacts.² In addition, the Swedish Actuarial Society, the Swedish Insurance Society and the Insurance Bureau for Consumers’ Enquiries should be mentioned.

33. Relations between the organizations of the insurance market and FI are not regulated by any legislation but are conducted on an informal basis. They include regular information as well as cooperation in committees and ad hoc groups.

34. At the end of 2000, 482 insurance companies were established on the Swedish market. Together, the insurance groups and firms that belong to the Federation covered nearly 100 percent of the Swedish life market and 94 percent of the non-life market.

35. Life insurance companies’ premium income rose by 25 percent to SKR 102.7 billion in 2000. The unit-linked insurance companies’ premium income was up 43 percent, while traditional life insurance companies increased their premium income by 13 percent. The year 2000 was thereby the first in which unit-linked insurance premiums surpassed premiums for traditional life insurance. Life insurance companies on average maintain good solvency ratio, amounting to 11 in 2000.

36. Non-life insurance companies’ premium income in 2000 amounted to SKR 34.9 billion, 5 percent higher than in 1999. On average, they also hold a 17.2 solvency ratio in 2000. Labor market insurance companies had aggregate premium income of SKR 15.8 billion, down 23 percent on 1999.

37. At year-end, insurance companies managed a total of SKR 1,820 billion, 4 percent higher than at the previous year end. Of this amount, SKR 894 billion (49 percent) was invested in shares and participations, and SKR 711 billion (39 percent) in bonds. Of aggregate investment assets, foreign assets made up SKR 623 billion (34 percent).

38. The importance of the insurance sector relative to the banking system has been increased from 1995 to 2000 continuously, illustrated by the ratio of domestic insurance liabilities to domestic bank deposits increasing from 0.8 to 1.2.

D. General Preconditions for Effective Insurance Supervision

39. The legal framework mainly consists of the Insurance Business Act, regulations, and guidelines for the operations of FI is sufficient. In addition there have been improvements in terms of supervisory tools or legal amendments on the way, which are coming into force next year. So far, almost all IAIS Insurance Core Principles (CP) are observed or broadly observed formally by FI.

40. However, the present serious difficulty in getting skilled staff and the resulting insufficient number of skilled employees have forced FI to define priorities. This of course leads to supervisory weaknesses and vulnerabilities in the insurance sector in the areas that have not been prioritized. For instance in the context of the supervision of financial conglomerates, the vulnerability of the insurance part may affect the other financial sectors of the financial conglomerate concerned in the form of contagion risk. Such a contagion in turn can cause a financial instability of the Swedish national economy with cross-border effects.

41. Because of the resource constraints FI doesn’t have the time desirable to examine the reports insurers send to the authority, which is one of FI’s primary tasks. FI also needs to find time to continue to develop new methods that would allow a risk-based supervision approach. Hence an effective insurance supervision seems to be jeopardized at the moment.

42. The general social system in Sweden provides a large part of the security needed by individual citizens in different situations. The Social Insurance Board or other public institutions do not compete with the private insurance sector. As a part of the recent reform of the pension system, there is, however, a mandatory unit-linked pensions saving in which the insured has the option to choose external investment funds from a list administered by the Premium Pension Authority.

43. There are some life insurance companies, which confine themselves exclusively to providing pensions and certain other payments for employees under a collective scheme. Employers and employees are partners in these companies. There are also a number of private life insurers and friendly societies working in the same field.

44. In accordance with the above-mentioned disassociation between social and private insurance, preconditions for effective insurance supervision are fulfilled.

E. Principle-by-Principle Assessment

Table 4.

Detailed Assessment of Observance of the IAIS Insurance Core Principles

Table 4.

Detailed Assessment of Observance of the IAIS Insurance Core Principles

Principle 1.	Organization of an Insurance Supervisor The insurance supervisor of a jurisdiction must be organized so that it is able to accomplish its primary task, i.e., to maintain efficient, fair, safe, and stable insurance markets for the benefit and protection of policyholders. It should, at any time, be able to carry out this task efficiently in accordance with the Insurance Core Principles. In particular, the insurance supervisor should: – be operationally independent and accountable in the exercise of its functions and powers; – have adequate powers, legal protection, and financial resources to perform its functions and exercise its powers; – adopt a clear, transparent, and consistent regulatory and supervisory process; – clearly define the responsibility for decision-making; and – hire, train, and maintain sufficient staff with high professional standards who follow the appropriate standards of confidentiality.
Description	(a) Independence FI is an independent authority with its own Board, with representatives from the parliament, the Central Bank, other authorities and the financial industry. In most cases, the Director General is the top decision-maker at the authority with the Board as his advisor. The Board decides on issues such as the annual financial report of FI. FI makes its own budget requests within the framework of the total state budget, which is put before the parliament each year. An amount equivalent to the approved budget is charged to financial institutions subject to supervision. Given its budget frameworks and the overall objectives, FI is independent in performing its regulatory and supervisory functions. In order to achieve the overall, general objectives, FI sets its own operational goals and objectives. Nevertheless if FI thinks that a legal gap has to be filled FI has to propose a new rule as a recommendation to the government. The government decides how the legal gap is treated. The government’s decision is binding on FI for all equal and similar cases in the future. (b) Employment system The staff represents a mix of highly skilled experts and staff with a broad overall knowledge of supervision. The operations are based on coordination of risk analysis in specific risk areas and general supervision. One of the main supervisory objectives is to produce group-wide risk assessments of major financial groups. FI is fully in control of its (approved) budget, including salaries, training of staff, equipment, travels etc. The parliament may not grant 100 percent of the budget request and hence prioritizations have to be made accordingly. The head of FI is appointed by the government for a minimum term and can be removed from office during such term only for reasons specified in law. Where the head of an agency is removed from office, the reasons must be publicly disclosed
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	Sweden formally observes the organization principle; however, in terms of professional resources there is scope for further improvement. The ongoing development of methods regarding risks related to insurance and the new responsibilities for the licensing and supervision of management companies and mutual funds call for additional resources of actuaries, risk experts, inspectors and legal counselors. FI has difficulties in filling existing posts and recruiting qualified staff especially actuaries. Therefore FI is forced to engage consulting firms for special actuarial and auditing tasks. The associated costs are paid by FI, but FI’s budget is restricted for such activities. Otherwise FI is legally entitled to appoint actuaries and auditors for special tasks which has been put down in the law. The appointment of the auditor is restricted for 5 years. The associated expenditure is paid by the concerning insurance undertakings. Of course the external actuaries and auditors have to comply with rules of confidentiality (Act of Secrecy 1980:100). Actuaries are recruited from the universities mainly; lawyers are recruited from the ministries primarily. Relating to the recruitment of young academics there is a cooperation between FI and the University of Stockholm and the insurance industry in particular dealing with insurance mathematics. The young professionals are educated by special tailored training in-house. Sometimes it is possible that FI-staff can join seminars of consulting firms or negotiate periods of practical training in insurance undertakings. The turnover of staff rate amounts to at least 15 percent. The average period of employment amounts to 5 to 10 years.
Principle 2.	Licensing Companies wishing to underwrite insurance in the domestic insurance market should be licensed. Where the insurance supervisor has authority to grant a license, the insurance supervisor: – in granting a license, should assess the suitability of owners, directors, and/or senior management, and the soundness of the business plan, which could include proforma financial statements, a capital plan, and projected solvency margins; and – in permitting access to the domestic market, may choose to rely on the work carried out by an insurance supervisor in another jurisdiction if the prudential rules of the two jurisdictions are broadly equivalent.
Description	2 (1) According to Chapter 2 Section 3 of the Insurance Business Act (1982:713) a concession granted by the supervisory authority is a condition for pursuing insurance business. Insurance business is not defined in the wording of the act but there is a close discussion in the preparatory work of the act about the concept and the circumstances that should be taken into consideration such as the need of supervision. There are also guiding decisions made by the court and the supervisory authority. The guiding decisions refer to insurance brokers mainly, because insurance brokers are also licensed by FI: According to the act the supervisory authority has the authority to grant license. There are legal provisions defining the tasks and responsibilities of the authority. Further particulars are in place through special instructions issued by the government. There is a comprehensive legal regulation concerning licensing in the insurance supervision law and the Insurance Business ordinance issued by the government. This regulation is supplemented by regulations and general guidelines issued by the supervisory authority giving more detailed licensing requirements. 2 (2) The permitted types of legal form are defined in the Insurance Business Act. According to the act, a condition for granting the license is that the natural and legal persons holding a direct or indirect qualifying participation in the applicant company are suitable to have a significant influence on the management of an insurance company. Another condition is that directors, the managing director and the deputy-managing director have sufficient qualifications and are suitable for managing an insurance company. According to the provisions in the Insurance Business Regulation, an application for license should account for the qualified owners. The details are governed by general guidelines issued by the supervisory authority. The information shall apply to the legal person, the directors, the deputy directors, the managing director, and the deputy-managing director. This information shall also be accounted for concerning the management of the insurance company. According to the law, the supervisory authority must refuse to issue the license if the owner is not able to establish that the business will be conducted in accordance with the regulations or the owner is unsuitable to have a significant influence on the management of the company. This is for the authority to decide. The owner is always considered to be unsuitable if he has considerably neglected his responsibilities financially or has been involved in serious crime. The information given by the company, according to the authority’s general guidelines concerning assessment of owners and management, enables the authority to assess all criteria stated in the third item of the Core Principles Methodology. A shortage may lead the authority to refusing the license. In most cases the authority obtains information from the tax authority, the enforcement service, the national police board, the register of companies, the register of insider trading, and the register of trade prohibition. This information is handled with the confidentiality requirements stated in the Secrecy Act. According to the preparatory work it is up to the authority to assess if the owner and management have sufficient qualifications and are sufficiently discerning in order to pursue insurance business on a long term basis according to applicable rules. According to the general guidelines the company has to provide information in order to enable the authority to make that assessment. If the owner is a legal person the information shall refer to the legal person, the directors, the deputy directors, the managing director and the deputy-managing director. Regarding the legal person, the company shall provide the last annual report and information concerning, group relationship, eventual bankruptcy, tax evasion and the like, the natural persons and his next of kin engagement in the insurance company. This information is checked with other relevant authorities. Regarding the directors, the deputy directors, the managing director and the deputy managing director, the company has to provide a complete curriculum vitae and a declaration confirming that they have not been involved in any sanctions, criminal proceedings, bankruptcy, tax evasion and the like. The company shall also provide information concerning these people’s involvement in other companies in order to assess if there are any conflict of interest. The supervisory authority has worked out a practice concerning how to deal with different issues actualized during the assessment. According to the law, the company is obliged to provide a business plan. The information in the business plan is regulated in the regulation concerning business plan issued by the authority. All information stated in items 7 and 8 of the Core Principles Methodology is to be provided. The minimum amount of capital required for all companies is regulated in the law. If the capital is below the minimum amount, the authority has to take remedial actions (e.g., requirement of a restoration plan due to the third EEC directives). According to the law, the company has to have a satisfactory equity ratio. In order to ensure this the supervisory authority normally requires a capital base doubling the required solvency margin. The prerequisites and criteria for outsourcing are stated in a standpoint issued by the authority. A standpoint is not directly legally binding for the insurance companies but the authority always checks outsourcing contracts before granting a license. The company always corrects shortages related to the standpoint. According to the standpoint the company should also inform the authority of all outsourcing contracts entered into when pursuing business. This is not always observed. According to the EEC directives, the insurance supervisory is not allowed to request and check informational material, policy conditions or the like as a prerequisite for granting a license. However it is possible for the authority to do so after granting a license as a part of the supervising procedures. This is regularly done regarding the technical conditions which, according to the law, shall be provided to the authority when they are put into practice at the latest. The documents required for licensing include information on formation of the company and name and address of the company, management, auditors, authorized signatory, and evidence of payment of share capital or initial fund. The law does not explicitly require the company to provide information concerning the actuaries but the company is obliged to have access to an authorized actuary. In order to ensure this, the authority always require this information before registering the company. According to the law it is not possible, as a general rule, to operate life insurance and non-life insurance in the same company except for accident and health insurance (e.g., permanent health insurance (PHI)) as a supplement to life insurance. It is also possible to operate both kinds of business if this was the case at the time of conclusion of the EEC agreement May 2, 1992. If both kinds of business are operated in the same company they are to be operated separately and the capital base for each business is to be calculated and reported also separately. According to the law the supervisory authority is able to revoke the license if the company no longer complies with the requirements for a license or in another way seriously neglects its responsibilities. FI usually decides on licensing. If the licensing involves matters of principal nature or particular importance, the decision is referred to the government. Even in those cases the application is handled by the authority and the authority recommends a decision to the government. The government’s decision, always comprehensively motivated, is send to the authority. The authority has issued a memorandum with information concerning the regulation and requirements for licensing. The memorandum is available on the authority’s web site. 2 (3) Regarding EEA insurers the supervisory authority is obliged to allow an establishment or cross-border activities if the supervisory authority of the home country certifies that the company fulfills the requirements in the home country and also provides some information concerning the company stated in the law. Regarding insurers outside the EEA they have to have a license issued by the Swedish authority. The procedure is the same as for domestic companies.
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	Sweden does not observe the licensing principle. Because of a lack in the relevant Act FI is not able to carry out the fit and proper test for an insurance company’s senior management/key persons (e.g., heads of the investment and legal departments, controller etc.). That presents an increment of the management risk. Existing composite insurance companies will be allowed to continue their operations as at present, but are obliged to keep separate accounting and records for life and non-life activity. There is a hierarchy within the different sources of the Swedish legal system. An act is the strongest legal requirement. Then comes the regulation. Act and regulation are both compulsory. The third one is the guideline, which has the character of a recommendation. If an insurance company does not comply with a guideline it has to give sound reasons for its non-compliance. Insurance companies should inform FI of all outsourcing contracts entered into when pursuing business. In order to enhance the enforcement of this standpoint the according requirement should be formulated as a regulation. The Appointed Auditor is required to review the outsourcing contracts case by case depending on decision of FI, but there is no legal basis for this requirement. Therefore this requirement should be incorporated into the guideline for Appointed Auditors. From a long-term perspective the requirement should be integrated into the Insurance Business Act and from a short-term perspective it is recommended to establish a new guideline concerning general lines of outsourcing contracts. Regarding insurers outside the EEA they should receive a license issued by FI only if the corresponding home insurance supervisory authority complies with the IAIS Insurance Core Principles. Thus a license could serve as an incentive for complying with these principles.
Principle 3.	Changes in Control The insurance supervisor should review changes in the control of companies that are licensed in the jurisdiction. The insurance supervisor should establish clear requirements to be met when a change in control occurs. These may be the same as, or similar to, the requirements which apply in granting a license. In particular, the insurance supervisor should: – require the purchaser or the licensed insurance company to provide notification of the change in control and/or seek approval of the proposed change; and – establish criteria to assess the appropriateness of the change, which could include the assessment of the suitability of the new owners as well as any new directors and senior managers, and the soundness of any new business plan.
Description	Regarding changes in the ownership, according to the law (Chapter 2 Section 3 and Chapter 3 Sections 2, 2a–2d Insurance Business Act (1982:713)), FI’s permission is a prerequisite for acquisition of shares leading to a qualified holding. Anyone who is going to sell a qualified holding is obliged to inform FI. FI evaluates the proposed change in the ownership, as described in 2 (2) of Principle 2 above, but similar to the assessment on the framework of changes of control, there is no fit and proper test including sufficiency of qualification, experience and suitability of the persons concerned. “Qualified holding” is defined in the law (Chapter 1 Section 9a Insurance Business Act (1982:713)).
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	Sweden does not observe the change of control principle. Because of a lack in the relevant Act FI is not able to carry out the fit and proper test for an insurance company’s senior management/key persons (e.g., heads of the investment and legal departments, controller etc.). In addition there is no fit and proper test including sufficiency of qualification, experience and suitability of the persons concerned. That presents an increment of the management risk. The essential and additional criteria are to a large extent fulfilled by compulsory prescriptions in the law or regulations (FFFS 1998:14) issued by FI. More detailed rules are stated in non-compulsory general guidelines, which, however, are complied with by the insurance undertakings
Principle 4.	Corporate Governance It is desirable that standards be established in the jurisdictions, which deal with corporate governance. Where the insurance supervisor has responsibility for setting requirements for corporate governance, the insurance supervisor should set requirements with respect to: – the roles and responsibilities of the Board of Directors; – reliance on other supervisors for companies licensed in another jurisdiction; and – the distinction between the standards to be met by companies incorporated in his jurisdiction and branch operations of companies incorporated in another jurisdiction.
Description	A comprehensive regulation of the management’s functions and responsibility is stated in the law (Chapter 8 Insurance Business Act (1982:713). The law is supplemented by general guidelines on management, internal information and internal control (FFFS 2000:3). According to the guidelines the board should set objectives and strategies pertaining the operations that the company is to carry on, guidelines for the risks that exist and make sure that written instructions are adopted for management and internal information. Guidelines should be set for how the internal control is to be organized. The general guidelines do not comprise the assignment of the Board of Directors. There are no explicit requirements in the Insurance Business Act for instructions or the like concerning the Board of Directors or the managing director. However according to authority practice the authority always emphasizes the importance of such instructions referring to the requirements in the general corporate law. In the Insurance Business Act there are regulations concerning the board’s competence to make decisions and a requirement for majority resolutions. The law does not permit the chairman of the board to be the same person as the managing director. According to the general guidelines on management, internal information and internal control there should be an independent audit function in place. According to the law the company is obliged to have an auditor elected by the general meeting independent of the company. According to the general guidelines there should be good internal control built into the parts of the company’s organization and instructions that aim to ensure that the accounting is correct and complete. According to the general guidelines on handling complaints issued by the authority the company should have in place a written instruction on complaint procedures. According to the regulations on information to policyholders in life insurance the company is obliged to provide information on the complaint procedures. The guidelines and regulations are issued according to the general principles of good practicing and good transparency stated in the law (Chapter 1 Section 1a Insurance Business Act (1982:713). According to the general guidelines on ethical standards (FFFS 1998:22) issued by the authority the Board of Directors should adopt guidelines on how the employees should handle ethical issues. The basis of the guidelines should be that the business should be in accordance with good practicing, consistent acting, fair and equal treatment.
Assessment	Observed.
Comments	One insurance company in Sweden offers both life insurance and health insurance and accident insurance. Cross-subsidizing is possible. Because of the FI’s scrutiny of the annual accounts, cross subsidizing is detected regularly. Such cases cause further detailed investigations by FI and discussions with the management of the insurance undertaking concerned. There are essentially four sources of regulation of the use of surplus in an insurance company: Insurance Business Act (1982:713), Chapter 12 Sections 5 and 6 Statute, Insurance contracts, and Accounting legislation. Surplus can result from a profit in the annual accounts and/or from capital transferred from restricted funds to free funds. The Insurance Business Act states that surplus shall be used as bonus to policyholders to the extent surplus is not used for paying dividends or covering losses, in accordance with the statute. Accounting regulations may also reduce the amount of surplus that can be paid as bonus. The statute must be approved by FI. The Insurance Business Act also states that bonus shall be transferred to policyholders and/or other beneficiaries with a distribution reflecting how the policies have contributed to the surplus, unless other rules for distribution follow from policy conditions or the statute. There is no approval routine for policy conditions but FI may take up a discussion on them with the company, if found necessary for some reason. The present legislation was introduced on January 1, 2000 and the government commented that it did not find it suitable to explicitly prohibit cross subsidizing or restrict the use of profits in order to subsidize premiums. It was hoped that transparency of policy conditions and an effective and competitive market would suffice. Since most life insurers have used the possibility to postpone the application of the legislative changes until January 1, 2002, there will not be any substantial experience from the new legislation until later. The restrictions due to accounting legislation are of minor importance in this context. The design and structure of the complaint procedure depend on the insurer. This procedure is not standardized in Sweden. Nevertheless the insurance company has to name a contact if a claimant calls. An important institution for customers and complainants is the “Consumers Insurance Information Bureau” (CIIB). CIIB’s main tasks are to give advice to customers and to help or rather support complainants for instance in claims-compensation questions. CIIB is a foundation founded by Försäkringsförbundet (Swedish Insurance Federation), the Insurance Consumer Agency (ICA) and FI, but financed by the insurance industry only. CIIB reports to FI concerning problems which they have noticed from consumers’ complaints. FI is a member of the CIIB’s Board. The primarily dimensions of the general principles of good practicing and good transparency are equitability, financial stability, fairness and security. In addition FI established guidelines on ethical standards. For example the ethical standards inter alia refer to the Employment Act. The ethical standards require the companies to carry out follow-ups in whose framework any breaches of the employment act have to be controlled. FI reviewed the implementation of the guidelines on ethical standards in more than 10 of the biggest Swedish insurance companies. All these companies implemented those standards but in some cases they had to be amended. Ethical standards are supporting the financial stability, because the compliance with them may have influence on the mitigation of reputation risk and operational risks (e.g., fraud, investment area).
Principle 5.	Internal Controls The insurance supervisor should be able to: – review the internal controls that the Board of Directors and management approve and apply, and request strengthening of the controls where necessary; and – require the Board of Directors to provide suitable prudential oversight, such as setting standards for underwriting risks and setting qualitative and quantitative standards for investment and liquidity management.
Description	FI looks upon the internal control mainly in two different ways; on-site inspections and review demanded accounts. Before an on-site-inspection FI demands the company to send guidelines and policies for review. FI also looks through protocols from meetings by the Board of Directors. That makes it possible to review the organizational structure and makes sure that the insurer for example has a clear delegation of authority. From the protocols FI can see if the Board gets correct and sufficient information before decisions are made. After that FI has a meeting with the Managing Director and the Chairman of the Board, where FI gets a brief presentation of the insurer and its organization. FI also meets the internal auditor, directors responsible for different areas and usually the investment staff. The on-site inspection produces a report where FI can make remarks or demand changes. If FI discovers serious inaccuracies or insufficient control the authority can give the insurer a critical comment depending on the importance of the failure concerned or an injunction to correct the failure. On-site inspections are done with support of rules and regulations. FI has issued detailed guidelines about internal control in general (FFFS 2000:3) and more specifics about underwriting and reinsurance risk (FFFS 2000:5)and valuation of technical provisions (FFFS 2000:4). FI also reviews insurers books (accounts). FI designates an auditor (appointed auditor) who reports to the authority and takes part in the audit of the insurer. FI also demands regular reports in specific areas.
Assessment	Observed.
Comments	In bigger companies the internal control is satisfying, of course there are always things to improve and FI often makes minor remarks. Generally FI makes more remarks to smaller companies, usually about the internal audit. However, concerning the current practice there is a tendency to make also more remarks to bigger undertakings. In accordance with guideline FFFS 2000:3 every insurer has to set up a reporting system referring to internal control/risk management. The risk management report is submitted to the Board of Directors. FI has the opportunity to review this report via its appointed auditor or the report has to be presented to the authority on demand. The report’s submission to FI is not mandatory. Because of the enhancing importance of the risk-based supervision for insurance undertakings, it should be implemented into the Insurance Business Act that the annual risk management report has to be presented to FI for scrutiny.
Principle 6.	Assets Standards should be established with respect to the assets of companies licensed to operate in the jurisdiction. Where insurance supervisors have the authority to establish the standards, these should apply at least to an amount of assets equal to the total of the technical provisions, and should address: – diversification by type; – any limits, or restrictions, on the amount that may be held in financial instruments, property, and receivables; – the basis for valuing assets which are included in the financial reports; – the safekeeping of assets; – appropriate matching of assets and liabilities; and – liquidity.
Description	In the law there are compulsory rules concerning the capital investment regarding the amount of assets equal to the technical provisions. The regulations address diversification by type of assets, the limits of the amount that may be held in the different types of assets and in an individual investment, the basis for valuing assets, appropriate matching off assets and liability, and liquidity. Safekeeping of assets and accountability for asset transactions is regulated in the regulations and general guidelines on register of assets equal to the technical provisions (FFFS 1996:30). According to the law the company shall set and observe a strategic investment policy concerning assets equal to the technical provisions. The Board of Directors shall adopt the policy. There are no regulations concerning the contents of the policy. In the general guidelines on management, internal information and internal control, there is a general requirement addressing the board on setting guidelines on handling of the risks that arise in the company’s operations. The types of risk defined in the guidelines are among those mentioned in the questionnaire. The scope of the guidelines should be that managing, identification and monitoring of the risks is satisfactory to ensure that the company can meet its commitments under insurance contracts in force. There should also be instructions that would ensure good internal control (see Principle 5). In addition, the delegation of responsibility should be defined. FI reviews the company’s guidelines. The review is carried out on an ad hoc basis by off-site inspection at the moment. This is a case-by-case procedure. If the authority considers the guidelines not in compliance with the law or insufficient this opinion is emphasized to the company to ensure the responsibility and control of the Board of Directors. However as long as the guidelines are not in conflict with the law the authority is not able to take any remedial actions.
Assessment	Observed.
Comments	The complete existing regulation gives FI sufficient remedy to act when necessary. FI applies a very simple stress test at the moment (FSSS 1997:5). FI intends to introduce a more sophisticated dynamic resilience test in 2002, although this kind of test is not explicitly required by the IAIS Insurance Core Principles. In life insurance the liabilities are most prudently assessed. The assets are assessed on the basis of market values. In non-life insurance on the liabilities side it is not allowed to discount the technical provisions. Their assessment is very close to the expected value. The annual premium is used as an estimator for the technical provisions. Assets are also assessed on the basis of market values. The policyholder’s surplus is not part of the technical provisions. In the case of unit linked policies the investment risk is transferred to the policyholders. The guaranteed interest rate amounts to 3.0 percent per annum at the moment. Concerning the segregation of the assets of policyholders and shareholders, FI established a general guideline on register of assets (FFFS 1996:30) equal to the technical provisions. An insurer’s unearned premium reserve is monitored by the company’s auditor and FI’s employees concerned. Relating to Chapter 7 Section 10g Insurance Business Act (1982:713) the insurance companies are required to set up an annual report on their strategic investment policy. This report is submitted to FI on demand only. On the other hand parts of those reports’ contents are disclosed to the public in the framework of economic journalism. Because of the shortfall of qualified staff, FI does not always have the possibility to react when, for example the reports from an insurer indicate a breach of investment regulation (increment of investment risks; see recommendation to Principle 1).
Principle 7.	Liabilities Insurance supervisors should establish standards with respect to the liabilities of companies licensed to operate in their jurisdiction. In developing the standards, the insurance supervisor should consider: – what is to be included as a liability of the company, for example, claims incurred but not paid, claims incurred but not reported, amounts owed to others, amounts owed that are in dispute, premiums received in advance, as well as the provision for policy liabilities or technical provisions that may be set by an actuary; – the standards for establishing policy liabilities or technical provisions; and – the amount of credit allowed reducing liabilities for amounts recoverable under reinsurance arrangements with a given reinsurer, making provision for the ultimate collectability.
Description	The liability of a company is described in Chapter 7, Section 1 Insurance Business Act (1982:713): A company’s technical provisions shall correspond to the amount that is required for the company to meet all liabilities that reasonably can be expected from policies issued. The technical provisions shall correspond to the company’s liability for: Claims, administration and other costs covering the remaining period of the contracts for policies in force. Claims incurred but not paid, costs for settling those claims and bonus due to payment (more non-life). Such bonus that is guaranteed as face value (= nominal value) or real value (reference to a commitment in relation to the consumer price index) and that is not covered by 1. or 2 (only in running contracts, which having guaranteed a bonus for enhancement of the sum insured (sequence of bonuses which are guaranteed for the corresponding rest of the insurance period); very seldom and not traditional in Sweden, therefore small amount). Such bonus that is dependent on changes in values of assets or technical results where the policyholder carries the financial risk. Equalization of losses in credit insurance (setting up of equalization reserves in the insurance class of credit insurance). Unit-linked insurance where the policyholder carries the financial risk. If more than one company hold the liability for a contract, each company’s technical provisions shall be calculated in proportion to each company’s liability under the contract. Technical provisions for incurred but not paid claims shall be assessed individually for each claim. They will be checked case by case by FI-staff. The review of those provisions is more a task of the auditors who are checking them regularly. The calculation is regulated in the EU-Accounting Directive. On the company’s side the actuaries are responsible for the correct calculation of the technical provisions both in life insurance and non-life insurance. Exchange of information takes place between FI and actuaries in auditor firms. In addition, IBNR (claims incurred but not reported), amounts in dispute, and premiums received in advance should be included in the technical provisions. For life business the technical provision should be the difference between the present value of the company’s liability and the present value of premiums that the company can expect according to the contract. For non-life the technical provision for unearned premiums shall be calculated in such a way that it is always equal to the provisions for each individual policy. The provision for unpaid claims shall include the future costs related to the policies in force. There is no specific limit for reduction of liabilities for amount recoverable under reinsurance arrangement. But, FI may reject the amount of credit allowed to reduce liabilities if the reinsurer or the reinsurance contract does not meet the standards that is deemed necessary in some respect.
Assessment	Observed.
Comments	According to the general guideline (FFFS 2000:4) the Board of Directors is responsible for instructions concerning technical provisions and liabilities. The instructions shall take into consideration different risks and products. They shall also ensure that there are satisfactory controls concerning the technical provisions. There are quarterly reports concerning assets covering liabilities. At least on a yearly basis there is an analysis of the technical provisions where companies are compared with each other and also over the years. If this analysis gives reasons for concern, the company is contacted. In accordance with Chapter 7 Section 3 Insurance Business Act (1982:713) both life and non-life insurers are required to introduce technical principles concerning the technical bases for calculation, premiums, reinsurance, solvency etc. which have to be adopted by the insurer’s Board of Directors. The life-insurance companies have to notify FI of the technical bases applied. There are also prescriptions in the above-mentioned Section for formulating further details (formulas, statistical bases) both for life and non-life insurers. Those principles do not have to be presented completely to FI. To calculate the technical provisions for incurred but not paid claims in non-life insurance FI applies the following method: FI calculates the ratio “r = (technical provision for incurred but not paid claims/premiums written)” for each non-life insurer on an annual basis. “r” is a random variable. The sample expected value and the sample variance of “r” are calculated. The average sample values of the non-life insurance industry are the criteria for the assessment. It is assumed that “r” is allocated in accordance with the normal distribution. If FI has collected a sufficient number of data then it should apply a goodness of fit test to improve the distribution assumption (e.g., log-normal distribution) eventually, provided that the collection of data is representative for the analysis concerned.
Principle 8.	Capital Adequacy and Solvency The requirements regarding the capital to be maintained by companies which are licensed, or seeking a license, in the jurisdiction should be clearly defined and should address the minimum levels of capital or the levels of deposits that should be maintained. Capital adequacy requirements should reflect the size, complexity, and business risks of the company in the jurisdiction.
Description	Regarding capital adequacy and solvency Sweden is following EU jurisdiction as far as possible. Local jurisdiction reflects for all main purposes EU rules and complementary regulations are few. In connection with a company seeking a license in the jurisdiction FI requires three years business plans. In order to give a license FI should consider the business plan as realistic and the solvency in the end of the three years period should fulfill the requirements according to the jurisdiction. The jurisdiction does not regulate the size of capital required–the evaluation is performed by FI and can vary from case to case depending on the concrete circumstances. Each company–life and non-life reports yearly in the end of May the solvency status. The reporting is registered and reviewed electronically. Insurers with material declines in solvency margin since the prior reporting period or reporting a solvency margin below the required minimum levels are followed up manually. FI contacts insurance companies that are considered to have problems to discuss measures for improving the solvency margin.
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	FI complies with the corresponding EU-directives. As of today the solvency requirement is measured and evaluated on a yearly basis. Though this topic is currently under discussion and in the near future FI will have a requirement that at given time intervals, insurance companies assess the amount of their available solvency margins (capital) (Solvency I). FI’s experience is that difference in assets markets values is the single major reason for changes in solvency margin during a year. FI requires the insurance companies in difficulties to present a plan for quick restoring of capital in compliance with the solvency rules. Concerning an insurance company’s seeking license according to jurisdiction, it is common that FI has the permission to intervene and require the insurance company to hold capital at a higher level than the required minimum margin where circumstances exist to justify such an action. For older companies FI’s practice is not so clear, but in principle FI has the described option. A disclosure note in the register is needed in order to inform FI whether parts of the assets are not free (collaterals), or can not be applied to covering the technical reserves. In spring 2002 FI intends to introduce qualitative risk assessment for insurance risks. Extending the application of risk-based supervisory tools as envisaged next year is a welcome development. Up to now FI could not comment on the requirement that the inflation of supervisory capital through double/multiple gearing or other financing techniques in an “insurance group” should be eliminated and the structure of the “insurance group” should be transparent (essential criterion 10 of CP 8). This is because the formulating of the corresponding regulation has still not been finalized. Effecting the appropriate regulation as envisaged on January 1, 2002 is a welcome development.
Principle 9.	Derivatives and ‘Off-Balance Sheet’ Items The insurance supervisor should be able to set requirements with respect to the use of financial instruments that may not form a part of the financial report of a company licensed in the jurisdiction. In setting these requirements, the insurance supervisor should address: – restrictions in the use of derivatives and other off-balance sheet items; – disclosure requirements for derivatives and other off-balance sheet items; and – the establishment of adequate internal controls and monitoring of derivative positions.
Description	According to the law (Chapter 7 Section 17b Insurance Business Act, 1982:713) the use of derivatives is restricted only to reduce the financial risk and to rationalize the management of the assets. The supervisory authority has been given the right to issue regulations concerning the application of the law. This right has not been used, because there are no such rules on Swedish banks either. Moreover, see principle 6 above. Even if there are no regulations concerning the application of the law the authority constantly reviews the capital investments and has the possibility to take remedial actions regarding the responsibility of the Board of Directors to ensure that the business is pursued to maintain a sufficient equity, liquidity and control over, among other things, investment risks. Disclosure requirements should be established for derivatives and other off-balance sheet items. FI’s control of adequate internal controls and monitoring of derivative positions is done within on- site inspections concerning internal controls and via the appointed auditors (see recommendation to Principle 5).
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	FI issues regulations and general guidelines concerning the annual and interim reports of insurance companies (FFFS 2000:22). These regulations include disclosure requirements for derivatives and off-balance sheet items. The disclosure requirements for derivatives and off-balance sheet items include quantitative as well as qualitative disclosure requirements. The disclosure requirements are to a high extent based on IAS 32 (Financial Instruments: disclosure and presentation). The application of mark to market values as shown in IAS 32 is better than the application of historical values Disclosure requirements should be established for derivatives and off-balance sheet items. FI’s requirements are fulfilled: FI requires insurers using derivatives to have in place an appropriate policy for their use, formulated and approved by the Board of Directors. Furthermore, FI requires that this policy should be consistent with the company’s activities, its overall strategic investment policy and asset/liability management strategy, and its risk tolerance. The policy concerned complies with the main elements described in the essential criteria 9.3. It addresses the following main elements: the purposes for which derivatives can be used; the establishment of appropriately structured exposure limits for derivatives taking into account the purpose of their use and the uncertainty caused by market credit, liquidity, cash flow, operation and legal risk; the extent to which the holding of some types of derivatives is restricted or not authorized; and the delineation of lines of responsibility and a framework of accountability for derivatives functions.
Principle 10.	Reinsurance Insurance companies use reinsurance as a means of risk containment. The insurance supervisor must be able to review reinsurance arrangements, to assess the degree of reliance placed on these arrangements and to determine the appropriateness of such reliance. Insurance companies would be expected to assess the financial positions of their reinsurers in determining an appropriate level of exposure to them. The insurance supervisor should set requirements with respect to reinsurance contracts or reinsurance companies addressing: – the amount of the credit taken for reinsurance ceded. The amount of credit taken should reflect an assessment of the ultimate collectability of the reinsurance recoverable and may take into account the supervisory control over the reinsurer; and – the amount of reliance placed on the insurance supervisor of the reinsurance business of a company which is incorporated in another jurisdiction.
Description	According to the Insurance Business Act pure reinsurance companies are equal to primary insurers. However there are some special rules: Investment restrictions: – the investment restriction applies to primary insurers. – pure reinsurers do not comprise of the rules except life reinsurers and long-term non-life reinsurer. – if a company has both primary insurance and reinsurance, investment restrictions are applied to the whole companies business. Rules concerning members of the board: – pure reinsures do not need to have a special member of the board for the insured interests. FI issued in 1995, brought up to date in 2000, a general guideline on management of underwriting risk and reinsurance within insurance companies (FFFS 2000:5). This guideline is not compulsory for the insurance companies. If a company does not follow the guideline the company has to account for their solution. Then it is up to FI to judge if that solution is good enough. The general guideline concern the main non-life companies, but where applicable it relates to all kind of insurance. According to the guideline the Board of Directors should establish a reinsurance program regarding reinsurance ceded. The reinsurance program should include among others principles for ceding reinsurance, self-retention, and general guidelines for the choice of reinsures (i.e., security). FI’s supervision of reinsurance is done through: 1. On-site inspection, in accordance with the general guideline FFFS 2000:5. The focus of inspections have been that the Board of Directors takes its responsibility in according to the general guideline, the company has appropriate routines and the internal control is good. 2. Companies with a big part of ceded reinsurance are asked in the beginning of the year to give a written description of their greater reinsurance contract. FI especially wants to know about the security of the reinsures they use. Companies who use reinsures with a low security will be followed up. 3. A model to assess the companies ceding of large exposures is under processing. According to the supervision of pure reinsurance companies in practice it is limited to licensing, reporting of the annual report and the solvency report. In Sweden today there are only a few Swedish reinsurance companies in business. Most of the big insurance groups have set their reinsurance companies in run-off.
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	Pure reinsurance companies are supervised in almost the same way as primary insurance undertakings. FI has set up a general guideline (FFFS 2000:5). According to the general guideline the Board of Directors should take a reinsurance policy concerning ceded reinsurance. Because of the shortfall of qualified staff FI is not able to scrutinize the reinsurance contracts regularly (increment of reinsurance risk; see recommendation to Principle 1). Primary insurers ceded reinsurance will be supervised through on site inspections, although the frequency has not yet been stipulated. Used reinsures security will be supervised through the yearly questionnaire. A model that assesses the companies ceding large exposures is on the way. This helps FI and insurers to identify major risks and to take measures to cover these risks. Introducing this supervisory instrument, as envisaged in 2002 is a welcome development.
Principle 11.	Market Conduct Insurance supervisors should ensure that insurers and intermediaries exercise the necessary knowledge, skills, and integrity in dealing with their customers. Insurers and intermediaries should: – at all times act honestly and in a straightforward manner; – act with due skill, care, and diligence in conducting their business activities; – conduct their business and organize their affairs with prudence; – pay due regard to the information needs of their customers and treat them fairly; – seek from their customers information which might reasonably be expected before giving advice or concluding a contract; – avoid conflicts of interest; – deal with their regulators in an open and cooperative way; – support a system of complaints handling, where applicable; and – organize and control their affairs effectively.
Description	Acquisition of insurance is FI’s responsibility but marketing is not. An insurance broker has to have certain skills to get licensed by FI (FFFS 1996:19). FI has issued rules about experience and theoretical knowledge for brokers. A person who gets a license must be fit and proper. The insurance companies have full responsibility for all other persons selling insurance. In conducting an on-site inspection on internal control, FI usually gets information about a company’s selling-organization and its policy in that area. Life and non-life insurance are usually separated in this exercise. In life insurance FI now focuses on information given to the insured as well as presumptive customers. It is very important that the customer understands the information given by the companies and that the information is relevant to the customer. At present FI makes on-site inspections to see how insurers prepare themselves for the newly issued information-rules. When selling a non-life insurance it is very important that the broker or the seller figures out the customers needs. FI does not accept that a person should be twice insured for the same risk. Therefore the broker or seller needs relevant information from the customer. It is not so common that FI makes on-site inspections in this area. But FI usually makes on-site inspections to see how insurers deal with claims and specialty personal injuries. FI thinks it is important that the injured gets compensation on objective grounds even without the assistance of a lawyer, and that the company deals with its claim in due order with secrecy. FI reviews how companies deal with customer complaints. Every company has to appoint a person who is responsible for customer complaints. FI has listed all appointed persons in a register and can assist claimants with information. In conducting an on-site inspection on internal control, FI always demands to see the guidelines for handling complaints (FFFS 1996:25). FI does not handle complaints but can use the information. FI starts an off-site inspection to investigate how a company deals with complaints, if it gets a lot of similar complaints.
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	Due to insufficient resources in the insurance division of FI the authority does not usually make on-site inspections at insurance-brokers, ad hoc-inspections not included. FI receives a lot of information that brokers do not fulfill the requirements but FI does not have the possibility to respond on such information. In general in Sweden it is difficult to have any supervision concerning market conduct, which presents an increment of underwriting risk (see recommendation to Principle 1). Normally FI has no problems with market conduct. FI acts against complaints, reads about grievances in newspapers or otherwise receives information about grievances. FI has during recent years made companies’ inspections on claims and personal injuries. In general it takes too long for companies to handle personal injuries. This is caused by a certain shortage of adjusters and therefore it is difficult to overcome this problem. It is recommended to establish procedures to ensure that companies are in compliance with legislation and guidelines.
Principle 12.	Financial Reporting It is important that insurance supervisors get the information they need to properly form an opinion on the financial strength of the operations of each insurance company in their jurisdiction. The information needed to carry out this review and analysis is obtained from the financial and statistical reports that are filed on a regular basis, supported by information obtained through special information requests, on-site inspections, and communication with actuaries and external auditors. A process should be established for: – setting the scope and frequency of reports requested and received from all companies licensed in the jurisdiction, including financial reports, statistical reports, actuarial reports, and other information; – setting the accounting requirements for the preparation of financial reports in the jurisdiction; – ensuring that external audits of insurance companies operating in the jurisdiction are acceptable; and – setting the standards for the establishment of technical provisions or policy and other liabilities to be included in the financial reports in the jurisdiction. In so doing, a distinction may be made: – between the standards that apply to reports and calculations prepared for disclosure to policyholders and investors, and those prepared for the insurance supervisor; and – between the financial reports and calculations prepared for companies incorporated in the jurisdiction, and branch operations of companies incorporated in another jurisdiction.
Description	According to Insurance Business Act, Insurance Business Decree and other laws (Insurance Brokers Act, Friendly Societies Act) FI has the permission to set the scope and frequency of reports requested, including financial reports, statistical reports and actuarial reports, and received from all companies licensed in the jurisdiction. There are quite a few regulations issued by FI that regulate the collection of statistical data. There are for instance regulations concerning: profit and loss accounts; performance analysis; solvency; analysis of profitability; cross-border activities; and assets (quarterly reports). The external auditors in Sweden have a good reputation as competent and independent. FI has the permission to appoint an auditor. An appointed auditor works for FI, but is paid for by the company. He has the same rights and responsibilities as the auditors appointed by the general meeting. FI has appointed auditors in nation-wide larger insurance companies and in companies with known problems. FI has the permission to stipulate the principles and norms regarding accounting and consolidation techniques (groups and conglomerates (IAS 22, 27 (consolidated financial statements) to be used for the purposes of reports provided to it for supervisory purposes. All listed companies in Sweden agree upon the recommendation of the Swedish Accounting Standard Counsel. FI requires insurance companies to utilize valuation rules that are consistent, realistic and prudent. FI has the permission to issue principles for the establishment of technical provisions (policy liabilities) and other liabilities to be included in the financial reports in the jurisdiction (FFFS 2000:22 pages 18, 20).
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	FI has the permission to request the information the authority needs. This is also done regarding to the actual laws. A review of the requested reporting has started. The aim of the review is to find out if it is possible to reduce the amount of information reported to FI. Insurance companies in Sweden have to comply with the accounting regulations in the Annual Accounts Act for Insurance Companies, “Lagen om årsredovisning i försäkringsföretag, (1995:1560), ÅRFL” The act is partly an implementation of the Insurance Accounting Directive, 91/674/EEG, IAD. ÅRFL refers to a great extent (mainly related to accounting issues not specific for financial institutions) to paragraphs in the Annual Accounts Act, “Årsredovisningslagen, (1995:1554), ÅRL.” ÅRL applies to general companies, and is the result of the Swedish implementation of the fourth and seventh EU Company directives on annual accounts and consolidated accounts. According to Chapter 1 Section 4 of ÅRFL, FI has the right to issue binding regulations in the accounting area. FI has issued such regulations and general guidelines that consist of. Regulations that implement certain parts of the IAD; Clarifications of ÅRFL, and more detailed accounting regulation on accounting for financial instruments and insurance contracts. So the accounting laws provide the legal framework and the more detailed regulation is provided by the binding regulations issued by FI. In the annual financial statements, insurance companies must state whether they comply with the regulations issued by FI. Any deviation must be disclosed and could render a qualified opinion by the auditor. The Annual Accounts Act for Insurance Companies states that all Swedish insurance companies must issue annual reports. The regulations issued by FI state that insurance companies with net assets exceeding SKR 1 million must publish one interim report yearly. In FI’s opinion the auditors in general are acceptable and have a high standard in knowledge and independence. Under certain circumstances insurance companies are required to utilize valuation rules that are consistent, realistic and prudent. Under certain circumstances and special provisions in the Insurance Business Act (Försäkringsrörelselagen) (Chapter 7 Sections 1, 2), FI has the permission to issue principles for the establishment of technical provisions (policy liabilities) and other liabilities to be included in the financial reports in the jurisdiction (FFFS 1998:25 (discount-rate)). The actuarial report needs to be amended: (a) Life insurance: the Responsible Actuary should take into account the asset-side when forming an opinion of the financial status of the company. A corresponding prescription should be incorporated into the Insurance Business Act. (b) Non-life insurance: non-life actuaries are reporting more about the reserves’ development. Hence for reasons of the quality-guarantee of the actuarial report the non-life Responsible Actuary should sign his report. This procedure should be written into a FI-regulation.
Principle 13.	On-Site Inspection The insurance supervisor should be able to: – carry out on-site inspections to review the business and affairs of the company, including the inspection of books, records, accounts, and other documents. This may be limited to the operation of the company in the jurisdiction or, subject to the agreement of the respective supervisors, include other jurisdictions in which the company operates; and – request and receive any information from companies licensed in its jurisdiction, whether this information be specific to a company or be requested of all companies.
Description	FI’s activities are guided by legislation. The Insurance Business Act also stipulates that the Board of Directors, managing directors and other officers responsible for the business are obliged to provide requested information to FI. FI can review company-branches, and has a bilateral MOU with Kredittilsynet in Norway about inspections and information concerning an insurance company. FI works with different manuals and FI usually demand written information before visiting a company. For larger insurers, an on site inspection lasts 2-3 days and is carried out at least once a year. The on site inspection procedure starts with sending a special questionnaire designed by FI to the concerning insurer. After a certain period the insurance company submits its answers FI. FI analyzes the company’s reply. Usually the result of the analysis leads to further questions, which are discussed with the company’s senior people during FI’s company visit. Afterwards FI sends an official letter including the on site inspection report to the inspected insurer for comments. The report is revised. The final report is sent to the insurance undertaking for information only.
Assessment	Observed.
Comments	FI has not had problems in getting the information it needs or in conducting inspections. Normally FI gives companies time to prepare a visit. For the IAIS assessment, FI has demanded information the same day or arranged a meeting in a few days.
Principle 14.	Sanctions Insurance supervisors must have the power to take remedial action where problems involving licensed companies are identified. The insurance supervisor must have a range of actions available in order to apply appropriate sanctions to problems encountered. The legislation should set out the powers available to the insurance supervisor and may include: – the power to restrict the business activities of a company, for example, by withholding approval for new activities or acquisitions; – the power to direct a company to stop practices that are unsafe or unsound, or to take action to remedy an unsafe or unsound business practice; and – the option to invoke other sanctions on a company or its business operation in the jurisdiction, for example, by revoking the license of a company or imposing remedial measures where a company violates the insurance laws of the jurisdiction.
Description	According to the law (Chapter 2 Section 3 Insurance Business Act (1982:713)) the FI shall refuse a license if the company has a close connection to someone that will hinders the effective supervision. If the company no longer meets the requirements for license FI shall revoke the license. According to the law (Chapter 19 Section 11 Insurance Business Act (1982:713)) FI may issue a reminder when appraised necessary. In more severe cases, defined in the law (Chapter 19 Section 11 Insurance Business Act (1982:713)), FI shall issue an injunction. The purpose of a reminder and an injunction is to oblige the company to comply with FI’s decision. Severe cases mentioned in the law are, among other things, that the company does not comply with the regulations or if someone in the management of the company is no longer considered suitable. An injunction can be combined with a conditional fine. If the company does not comply with the injunction FI may also revoke the license. In practice FI usually first makes an informal reminder. If the company does not make a correction after that FI will take measures as mentioned above. FI also has the power to restrict the company’s freedom to dispose of assets. Different kinds of control measure enable FI to detect the kind of disparities that require remedial actions. The type of action and the time limitation for carrying it out depends on the seriousness of the case and the consequences it may have for the insured. If formal sanctions are imposed FI addresses the company and the Board of Directors. They are requested to submit a plan for the measure proposed and a recovery plan within a certain time, which depends on the measure, to be approved by FI. According to the law (Chapter 19 Section 11 Insurance Business Act (1982:713)) FI has the power to restrict the company’s freedom to dispose of assets in Sweden in situations defined in the law (Chapter 19 Section 11 Insurance Business Act (1982:713)). This is the case if the financial position of the company deteriorates in an inadmissible way. This measure may also be taken in order to protect the interests of the insured in case of a revoked license. In case of a winding up FI may appoint a special liquidator with the assignment of carrying through the winding up together with the liquidators appointed by the general meeting. If the capital base falls below the solvency margin FI is obliged to issue an injunction in order to oblige the company to take measures to restore its financial equilibrium. The company is obliged to submit a recovery plan. According to the law (Chapter 19 Section 11 Insurance Business Act (1982:713)) FI has the power to issue an injunction in order to oblige the managing director or the Board of Directors to make proper applications for registration and to provide certain information on letters, invoices and order forms. This is the only kind of sanctions for which FI has the power to address to the natural persons. They may however be prosecuted according to criminal law and sentenced in a general court.
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	FI has the power to take remedial actions when necessary. On the whole FI is given the possibility of choosing an adequate sanction. However FI is lacking in the possibility of issuing a formal criticism in cases where there is a need for a sharp reprimand but not obliging the company to take measures.
Principle 15.	Cross-Border Business Operations Insurance companies are becoming increasingly international in scope, establishing branches and subsidiaries outside their home jurisdiction, and sometimes conducting cross-border business on a services basis only. The insurance supervisor should ensure that: – no foreign insurance establishment escapes supervision; – all insurance establishments of international insurance groups and international insurers are subject to effective supervision; – the creation of a cross-border insurance establishment is subject to consultation between host and home supervisors; and – foreign insurers providing insurance cover on a cross-border services basis are subject to effective supervision.
Description	The provisions concerning cross-border business operations are written in Chapter 2a Insurance Business Act (1982:713) and in Chapter 2 Act on Foreign Insurance Companies operating in Sweden (1998:293). FI acts in accordance with the Directives on life assurance and non-life insurance. It also acts in accordance with the protocol relating to the collaboration of the supervisory authorities of the Member States of the European Community in particular in the application of the Directives on life assurance and non-life insurance. For EEA insurers, home country control and the principle of one single license are valid, according to the third generation EC insurance directives as implemented into Swedish legislation. The activities of a Swiss insurer in Sweden are regulated in accordance with the special arrangements between Switzerland and the EC, as implemented in Swedish law (FFFS 1996:222). Cross-border activities are possible for EEA insurers after a prescribed notification procedure to the home country authority of the head-office. For an EEA insurer, the home country authorities are responsible for supervision and the capital requirements of the home country apply. For a non-EEA insurer, the same rules apply as for domestic companies. Chapter 4 Act on Foreign Insurance Companies operating in Sweden contains provisions concerning non-EEA insurers. For non-EEA insurers, cross-border activities without authorization are only possible through intermediation by an independent insurance broker or when insurance is sought actively by the policyholder. Otherwise they can operate only through an insurer authorized in Sweden with whom they have an agreement of cooperation or if they both belong to the same group of companies. Authorization from FI is then needed. The creations of cross-border insurance establishment are subject to consultation between host and home supervisors. The supervisory authorities involved are obliged to conduct a mutual consultation before approving a transfer of portfolio, according to the Chapter 9 Section 7 Act on Foreign Insurance Companies operating in Sweden.
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	It is not clear whether Sweden is in a position to actively supervise branches of Swedish-based insurers in other EEA member States in practice, given the very limited resources of the supervisor (see recommendation to Principle 1). There is only one foreign insurance undertaking which is operating business in Sweden. This financial institution is a general agency of the Swiss insurer ZFS (Zürich Financial Services) running non-life insurance business in Sweden only. The general agent has been licensed by FI. FI supervises all legal matters of this general agency (e.g., claims compensation, fit and proper aspects etc.) while the Swiss insurance supervisory authority does all financial matters (e.g., solvency, accounting etc.)
Principle 16.	Coordination and Cooperation Increasingly, insurance supervisors liaise with each other to ensure that each is aware of the other’s concerns with respect to an insurance company that operates in more than one jurisdiction, either directly or through a separate corporate entity. In order to share relevant information with other insurance supervisors, adequate and effective communication should be developed and maintained. In developing or implementing a regulatory framework, consideration should be given to whether the insurance supervisor: – is able to enter into an agreement or understanding with any other supervisor both in other jurisdictions and in other sectors of the industry (i.e., insurance, banking, or securities) to share information or otherwise work together; – is permitted to share information, or otherwise work together, with an insurance supervisor in another jurisdiction. This may be limited to insurance supervisors who have agreed, and are legally able, to treat the information as confidential; – should be informed of findings of investigations where power to investigate fraud, money laundering, and other such activities rests with a body other than the insurance supervisor; and – is permitted to set out the types of information and the basis on which information obtained by the insurance supervisor may be shared.
Description	FI in Sweden does the supervision of the financial sector. Within FI everyone has access to information. Exchange of information between authorities is subject to secrecy legislation. FI has the authority to come to an agreement with a foreign financial supervisory authority. It has been done with Kredittilsynet (Norwegian financial supervisory authority) about a non-life company, if it is a Swedish non-life company and has about 40 percent of the Norwegian insurance business of the private area. In the agreement it is stipulated that the two authorities will exchange information. A company supervised by FI has an obligation to inform FI if they have been exposed to an attempt to fraud, money laundering, etc. Regarding the remaining part of the principle, refer to principle 17 below.
Assessment	Observed.
Comments	All information within FI is public. If someone asks for certain information from FI concerning a company FI has to do a secrecy trial before FI can set out information. Information concerning business secrets is always classified. If FI has signed an agreement of cooperation concerning the supervision of a special company, and the duty of confidentiality is agreed it is possible to share classified information. FI supervises seven financial conglomerates. In connection with this supervision FI carries out an overall assessment for 13 entities: 6 insurance companies, 4 banking groups, and 3 security firms.
Principle 17.	Confidentiality All insurance supervisors should be subject to professional secrecy constraints in respect of information obtained in the course of their activities, including during the conduct of on-site inspections. The insurance supervisor is required to hold confidential any information received from other insurance supervisors, except where constrained by law or in situations where the insurance supervisor who provided the information provides authorization for its release. Jurisdictions whose confidentiality requirements continue to constrain or prevent the sharing of information for supervisory purposes with insurance supervisors in other jurisdictions, and jurisdictions where information received from another insurance supervisor cannot be kept confidential, are urged to review their requirements.
Description	FI has the statutory power to share prudential information with other supervisors with few limitations, provided it is deemed to be in the Swedish interests to share the information. In accordance with the Act (1982:713) on the Insurance business, FI has a duty to have a close cooperation with supervisors, especially in other EU-countries. FI participates also several international cooperations, e.g., IAIS. Importantly, according to Swedish legislation, a disclosure of information requires normally a consideration of a possible harm that might follow in each single case. This consideration of harm will be based on Swedish law, primarily on the Act on Secrecy. The act does not accept a general principle of originated control of secrecy between authorities. On the contrary, by Swedish law, one can not normally maintain the confidentiality of the exchanged information, once it is provided to another authority. Information, once has been handed out, is in principle at the receiver’s disposal. An exception to that principle is the information received from another foreign authority according to a MOU. The right of a Swedish authority to disclose information about professional secrecy is set out in Chapter 1 Section 3 of the Act on Secrecy (1980:100). Information classified as secret in accordance with the Act on Secrecy must not be disclosed to a foreign authority in any other way than pursuant to a provision in law or ordinance. Alternatively, if the information may be forwarded to a Swedish authority and it is deemed to be consistent with Swedish interests, the information may also be released to the foreign authority. Thus, this provision gives FI a fairly good possibility to disclose documents and information to competent authorities in other countries. The obligation of FI to inform other authorities is to a large extent relevant for the type of information that the Act on Secrecy refers to. According to Chapter 8 Section 5 of the Secrecy Act, secrecy shall apply in such activities of a public authority that consist of the issuance of permits or licenses or supervision with regard to the banking, insurance and secrecy business and information regarding: the business or management conditions on the part of an undertaking subject to supervision, if it may be assumed that a disclosure of the information will harm the company, the financial or personal conditions on the part of anyone else, who has entered into a business relation or a similar relation with a party subject to supervision. Furthermore, also according to Chapter 8 Section 5 of the Secrecy Act, the government may decide that secrecy applies at FI on information that FI has received according to an agreement with a foreign authority. If the Swedish government adds such an agreement between FI and a foreign supervisory authority to Section 1c of the Secrecy Ordinance (SFS 1980:657), confidentiality is thus preserved at FI concerning information received according to the agreement. The government has so far always decided that secrecy applies on information that FI has received according to memoranda of understanding (MOU), and those agreements has always been added to Section 1c of the Secrecy Ordinance. The referred provisions in the Act on Secrecy are - according to the Swedish legislators - applicable to such information that is provided according to provisions based on the EU-directives. In insurance there are only a few MOU’s. Additionally there are the “Protocol relating to the collaboration of the supervisory authorities of the member states of the European community in particular in the application of the directives on life assurance and non-life insurance” and the so-called “Helsinki-Protocol” concerning insurance groups. According to 1.4 of this agreement the supervisory authorities has agreed to exchange confidential information whenever possible within the limits of the rules laid down in the Third Life and Non-life Directives (Articles 16.1 and 16.2 of the Third Non-life Directive and 15.1 and 15.2 of the Third Life Directive) in order to improve the effectiveness of insurance supervision in the European Community.
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	The principle has been implemented by law, MOUs and to some extent by the Protocol. A case by case approach is more traditionally than general principles. FI has negotiated several cross-sectoral MOUs with Norway, Baltic countries and Denmark, Finland, Norway as a group. In order to achieve a completely free exchange of information, including facts that could be regarded as negative to an institute subject to supervision, not only a certain modification of the Swedish Act on Secrecy but also an international convention on the subject or a bilateral agreement between the authorities in different states is required.

View Table

Table 4.

Detailed Assessment of Observance of the IAIS Insurance Core Principles

Principle 1.	Organization of an Insurance Supervisor The insurance supervisor of a jurisdiction must be organized so that it is able to accomplish its primary task, i.e., to maintain efficient, fair, safe, and stable insurance markets for the benefit and protection of policyholders. It should, at any time, be able to carry out this task efficiently in accordance with the Insurance Core Principles. In particular, the insurance supervisor should: – be operationally independent and accountable in the exercise of its functions and powers; – have adequate powers, legal protection, and financial resources to perform its functions and exercise its powers; – adopt a clear, transparent, and consistent regulatory and supervisory process; – clearly define the responsibility for decision-making; and – hire, train, and maintain sufficient staff with high professional standards who follow the appropriate standards of confidentiality.
Description	(a) Independence FI is an independent authority with its own Board, with representatives from the parliament, the Central Bank, other authorities and the financial industry. In most cases, the Director General is the top decision-maker at the authority with the Board as his advisor. The Board decides on issues such as the annual financial report of FI. FI makes its own budget requests within the framework of the total state budget, which is put before the parliament each year. An amount equivalent to the approved budget is charged to financial institutions subject to supervision. Given its budget frameworks and the overall objectives, FI is independent in performing its regulatory and supervisory functions. In order to achieve the overall, general objectives, FI sets its own operational goals and objectives. Nevertheless if FI thinks that a legal gap has to be filled FI has to propose a new rule as a recommendation to the government. The government decides how the legal gap is treated. The government’s decision is binding on FI for all equal and similar cases in the future. (b) Employment system The staff represents a mix of highly skilled experts and staff with a broad overall knowledge of supervision. The operations are based on coordination of risk analysis in specific risk areas and general supervision. One of the main supervisory objectives is to produce group-wide risk assessments of major financial groups. FI is fully in control of its (approved) budget, including salaries, training of staff, equipment, travels etc. The parliament may not grant 100 percent of the budget request and hence prioritizations have to be made accordingly. The head of FI is appointed by the government for a minimum term and can be removed from office during such term only for reasons specified in law. Where the head of an agency is removed from office, the reasons must be publicly disclosed
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	Sweden formally observes the organization principle; however, in terms of professional resources there is scope for further improvement. The ongoing development of methods regarding risks related to insurance and the new responsibilities for the licensing and supervision of management companies and mutual funds call for additional resources of actuaries, risk experts, inspectors and legal counselors. FI has difficulties in filling existing posts and recruiting qualified staff especially actuaries. Therefore FI is forced to engage consulting firms for special actuarial and auditing tasks. The associated costs are paid by FI, but FI’s budget is restricted for such activities. Otherwise FI is legally entitled to appoint actuaries and auditors for special tasks which has been put down in the law. The appointment of the auditor is restricted for 5 years. The associated expenditure is paid by the concerning insurance undertakings. Of course the external actuaries and auditors have to comply with rules of confidentiality (Act of Secrecy 1980:100). Actuaries are recruited from the universities mainly; lawyers are recruited from the ministries primarily. Relating to the recruitment of young academics there is a cooperation between FI and the University of Stockholm and the insurance industry in particular dealing with insurance mathematics. The young professionals are educated by special tailored training in-house. Sometimes it is possible that FI-staff can join seminars of consulting firms or negotiate periods of practical training in insurance undertakings. The turnover of staff rate amounts to at least 15 percent. The average period of employment amounts to 5 to 10 years.
Principle 2.	Licensing Companies wishing to underwrite insurance in the domestic insurance market should be licensed. Where the insurance supervisor has authority to grant a license, the insurance supervisor: – in granting a license, should assess the suitability of owners, directors, and/or senior management, and the soundness of the business plan, which could include proforma financial statements, a capital plan, and projected solvency margins; and – in permitting access to the domestic market, may choose to rely on the work carried out by an insurance supervisor in another jurisdiction if the prudential rules of the two jurisdictions are broadly equivalent.
Description	2 (1) According to Chapter 2 Section 3 of the Insurance Business Act (1982:713) a concession granted by the supervisory authority is a condition for pursuing insurance business. Insurance business is not defined in the wording of the act but there is a close discussion in the preparatory work of the act about the concept and the circumstances that should be taken into consideration such as the need of supervision. There are also guiding decisions made by the court and the supervisory authority. The guiding decisions refer to insurance brokers mainly, because insurance brokers are also licensed by FI: According to the act the supervisory authority has the authority to grant license. There are legal provisions defining the tasks and responsibilities of the authority. Further particulars are in place through special instructions issued by the government. There is a comprehensive legal regulation concerning licensing in the insurance supervision law and the Insurance Business ordinance issued by the government. This regulation is supplemented by regulations and general guidelines issued by the supervisory authority giving more detailed licensing requirements. 2 (2) The permitted types of legal form are defined in the Insurance Business Act. According to the act, a condition for granting the license is that the natural and legal persons holding a direct or indirect qualifying participation in the applicant company are suitable to have a significant influence on the management of an insurance company. Another condition is that directors, the managing director and the deputy-managing director have sufficient qualifications and are suitable for managing an insurance company. According to the provisions in the Insurance Business Regulation, an application for license should account for the qualified owners. The details are governed by general guidelines issued by the supervisory authority. The information shall apply to the legal person, the directors, the deputy directors, the managing director, and the deputy-managing director. This information shall also be accounted for concerning the management of the insurance company. According to the law, the supervisory authority must refuse to issue the license if the owner is not able to establish that the business will be conducted in accordance with the regulations or the owner is unsuitable to have a significant influence on the management of the company. This is for the authority to decide. The owner is always considered to be unsuitable if he has considerably neglected his responsibilities financially or has been involved in serious crime. The information given by the company, according to the authority’s general guidelines concerning assessment of owners and management, enables the authority to assess all criteria stated in the third item of the Core Principles Methodology. A shortage may lead the authority to refusing the license. In most cases the authority obtains information from the tax authority, the enforcement service, the national police board, the register of companies, the register of insider trading, and the register of trade prohibition. This information is handled with the confidentiality requirements stated in the Secrecy Act. According to the preparatory work it is up to the authority to assess if the owner and management have sufficient qualifications and are sufficiently discerning in order to pursue insurance business on a long term basis according to applicable rules. According to the general guidelines the company has to provide information in order to enable the authority to make that assessment. If the owner is a legal person the information shall refer to the legal person, the directors, the deputy directors, the managing director and the deputy-managing director. Regarding the legal person, the company shall provide the last annual report and information concerning, group relationship, eventual bankruptcy, tax evasion and the like, the natural persons and his next of kin engagement in the insurance company. This information is checked with other relevant authorities. Regarding the directors, the deputy directors, the managing director and the deputy managing director, the company has to provide a complete curriculum vitae and a declaration confirming that they have not been involved in any sanctions, criminal proceedings, bankruptcy, tax evasion and the like. The company shall also provide information concerning these people’s involvement in other companies in order to assess if there are any conflict of interest. The supervisory authority has worked out a practice concerning how to deal with different issues actualized during the assessment. According to the law, the company is obliged to provide a business plan. The information in the business plan is regulated in the regulation concerning business plan issued by the authority. All information stated in items 7 and 8 of the Core Principles Methodology is to be provided. The minimum amount of capital required for all companies is regulated in the law. If the capital is below the minimum amount, the authority has to take remedial actions (e.g., requirement of a restoration plan due to the third EEC directives). According to the law, the company has to have a satisfactory equity ratio. In order to ensure this the supervisory authority normally requires a capital base doubling the required solvency margin. The prerequisites and criteria for outsourcing are stated in a standpoint issued by the authority. A standpoint is not directly legally binding for the insurance companies but the authority always checks outsourcing contracts before granting a license. The company always corrects shortages related to the standpoint. According to the standpoint the company should also inform the authority of all outsourcing contracts entered into when pursuing business. This is not always observed. According to the EEC directives, the insurance supervisory is not allowed to request and check informational material, policy conditions or the like as a prerequisite for granting a license. However it is possible for the authority to do so after granting a license as a part of the supervising procedures. This is regularly done regarding the technical conditions which, according to the law, shall be provided to the authority when they are put into practice at the latest. The documents required for licensing include information on formation of the company and name and address of the company, management, auditors, authorized signatory, and evidence of payment of share capital or initial fund. The law does not explicitly require the company to provide information concerning the actuaries but the company is obliged to have access to an authorized actuary. In order to ensure this, the authority always require this information before registering the company. According to the law it is not possible, as a general rule, to operate life insurance and non-life insurance in the same company except for accident and health insurance (e.g., permanent health insurance (PHI)) as a supplement to life insurance. It is also possible to operate both kinds of business if this was the case at the time of conclusion of the EEC agreement May 2, 1992. If both kinds of business are operated in the same company they are to be operated separately and the capital base for each business is to be calculated and reported also separately. According to the law the supervisory authority is able to revoke the license if the company no longer complies with the requirements for a license or in another way seriously neglects its responsibilities. FI usually decides on licensing. If the licensing involves matters of principal nature or particular importance, the decision is referred to the government. Even in those cases the application is handled by the authority and the authority recommends a decision to the government. The government’s decision, always comprehensively motivated, is send to the authority. The authority has issued a memorandum with information concerning the regulation and requirements for licensing. The memorandum is available on the authority’s web site. 2 (3) Regarding EEA insurers the supervisory authority is obliged to allow an establishment or cross-border activities if the supervisory authority of the home country certifies that the company fulfills the requirements in the home country and also provides some information concerning the company stated in the law. Regarding insurers outside the EEA they have to have a license issued by the Swedish authority. The procedure is the same as for domestic companies.
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	Sweden does not observe the licensing principle. Because of a lack in the relevant Act FI is not able to carry out the fit and proper test for an insurance company’s senior management/key persons (e.g., heads of the investment and legal departments, controller etc.). That presents an increment of the management risk. Existing composite insurance companies will be allowed to continue their operations as at present, but are obliged to keep separate accounting and records for life and non-life activity. There is a hierarchy within the different sources of the Swedish legal system. An act is the strongest legal requirement. Then comes the regulation. Act and regulation are both compulsory. The third one is the guideline, which has the character of a recommendation. If an insurance company does not comply with a guideline it has to give sound reasons for its non-compliance. Insurance companies should inform FI of all outsourcing contracts entered into when pursuing business. In order to enhance the enforcement of this standpoint the according requirement should be formulated as a regulation. The Appointed Auditor is required to review the outsourcing contracts case by case depending on decision of FI, but there is no legal basis for this requirement. Therefore this requirement should be incorporated into the guideline for Appointed Auditors. From a long-term perspective the requirement should be integrated into the Insurance Business Act and from a short-term perspective it is recommended to establish a new guideline concerning general lines of outsourcing contracts. Regarding insurers outside the EEA they should receive a license issued by FI only if the corresponding home insurance supervisory authority complies with the IAIS Insurance Core Principles. Thus a license could serve as an incentive for complying with these principles.
Principle 3.	Changes in Control The insurance supervisor should review changes in the control of companies that are licensed in the jurisdiction. The insurance supervisor should establish clear requirements to be met when a change in control occurs. These may be the same as, or similar to, the requirements which apply in granting a license. In particular, the insurance supervisor should: – require the purchaser or the licensed insurance company to provide notification of the change in control and/or seek approval of the proposed change; and – establish criteria to assess the appropriateness of the change, which could include the assessment of the suitability of the new owners as well as any new directors and senior managers, and the soundness of any new business plan.
Description	Regarding changes in the ownership, according to the law (Chapter 2 Section 3 and Chapter 3 Sections 2, 2a–2d Insurance Business Act (1982:713)), FI’s permission is a prerequisite for acquisition of shares leading to a qualified holding. Anyone who is going to sell a qualified holding is obliged to inform FI. FI evaluates the proposed change in the ownership, as described in 2 (2) of Principle 2 above, but similar to the assessment on the framework of changes of control, there is no fit and proper test including sufficiency of qualification, experience and suitability of the persons concerned. “Qualified holding” is defined in the law (Chapter 1 Section 9a Insurance Business Act (1982:713)).
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	Sweden does not observe the change of control principle. Because of a lack in the relevant Act FI is not able to carry out the fit and proper test for an insurance company’s senior management/key persons (e.g., heads of the investment and legal departments, controller etc.). In addition there is no fit and proper test including sufficiency of qualification, experience and suitability of the persons concerned. That presents an increment of the management risk. The essential and additional criteria are to a large extent fulfilled by compulsory prescriptions in the law or regulations (FFFS 1998:14) issued by FI. More detailed rules are stated in non-compulsory general guidelines, which, however, are complied with by the insurance undertakings
Principle 4.	Corporate Governance It is desirable that standards be established in the jurisdictions, which deal with corporate governance. Where the insurance supervisor has responsibility for setting requirements for corporate governance, the insurance supervisor should set requirements with respect to: – the roles and responsibilities of the Board of Directors; – reliance on other supervisors for companies licensed in another jurisdiction; and – the distinction between the standards to be met by companies incorporated in his jurisdiction and branch operations of companies incorporated in another jurisdiction.
Description	A comprehensive regulation of the management’s functions and responsibility is stated in the law (Chapter 8 Insurance Business Act (1982:713). The law is supplemented by general guidelines on management, internal information and internal control (FFFS 2000:3). According to the guidelines the board should set objectives and strategies pertaining the operations that the company is to carry on, guidelines for the risks that exist and make sure that written instructions are adopted for management and internal information. Guidelines should be set for how the internal control is to be organized. The general guidelines do not comprise the assignment of the Board of Directors. There are no explicit requirements in the Insurance Business Act for instructions or the like concerning the Board of Directors or the managing director. However according to authority practice the authority always emphasizes the importance of such instructions referring to the requirements in the general corporate law. In the Insurance Business Act there are regulations concerning the board’s competence to make decisions and a requirement for majority resolutions. The law does not permit the chairman of the board to be the same person as the managing director. According to the general guidelines on management, internal information and internal control there should be an independent audit function in place. According to the law the company is obliged to have an auditor elected by the general meeting independent of the company. According to the general guidelines there should be good internal control built into the parts of the company’s organization and instructions that aim to ensure that the accounting is correct and complete. According to the general guidelines on handling complaints issued by the authority the company should have in place a written instruction on complaint procedures. According to the regulations on information to policyholders in life insurance the company is obliged to provide information on the complaint procedures. The guidelines and regulations are issued according to the general principles of good practicing and good transparency stated in the law (Chapter 1 Section 1a Insurance Business Act (1982:713). According to the general guidelines on ethical standards (FFFS 1998:22) issued by the authority the Board of Directors should adopt guidelines on how the employees should handle ethical issues. The basis of the guidelines should be that the business should be in accordance with good practicing, consistent acting, fair and equal treatment.
Assessment	Observed.
Comments	One insurance company in Sweden offers both life insurance and health insurance and accident insurance. Cross-subsidizing is possible. Because of the FI’s scrutiny of the annual accounts, cross subsidizing is detected regularly. Such cases cause further detailed investigations by FI and discussions with the management of the insurance undertaking concerned. There are essentially four sources of regulation of the use of surplus in an insurance company: Insurance Business Act (1982:713), Chapter 12 Sections 5 and 6 Statute, Insurance contracts, and Accounting legislation. Surplus can result from a profit in the annual accounts and/or from capital transferred from restricted funds to free funds. The Insurance Business Act states that surplus shall be used as bonus to policyholders to the extent surplus is not used for paying dividends or covering losses, in accordance with the statute. Accounting regulations may also reduce the amount of surplus that can be paid as bonus. The statute must be approved by FI. The Insurance Business Act also states that bonus shall be transferred to policyholders and/or other beneficiaries with a distribution reflecting how the policies have contributed to the surplus, unless other rules for distribution follow from policy conditions or the statute. There is no approval routine for policy conditions but FI may take up a discussion on them with the company, if found necessary for some reason. The present legislation was introduced on January 1, 2000 and the government commented that it did not find it suitable to explicitly prohibit cross subsidizing or restrict the use of profits in order to subsidize premiums. It was hoped that transparency of policy conditions and an effective and competitive market would suffice. Since most life insurers have used the possibility to postpone the application of the legislative changes until January 1, 2002, there will not be any substantial experience from the new legislation until later. The restrictions due to accounting legislation are of minor importance in this context. The design and structure of the complaint procedure depend on the insurer. This procedure is not standardized in Sweden. Nevertheless the insurance company has to name a contact if a claimant calls. An important institution for customers and complainants is the “Consumers Insurance Information Bureau” (CIIB). CIIB’s main tasks are to give advice to customers and to help or rather support complainants for instance in claims-compensation questions. CIIB is a foundation founded by Försäkringsförbundet (Swedish Insurance Federation), the Insurance Consumer Agency (ICA) and FI, but financed by the insurance industry only. CIIB reports to FI concerning problems which they have noticed from consumers’ complaints. FI is a member of the CIIB’s Board. The primarily dimensions of the general principles of good practicing and good transparency are equitability, financial stability, fairness and security. In addition FI established guidelines on ethical standards. For example the ethical standards inter alia refer to the Employment Act. The ethical standards require the companies to carry out follow-ups in whose framework any breaches of the employment act have to be controlled. FI reviewed the implementation of the guidelines on ethical standards in more than 10 of the biggest Swedish insurance companies. All these companies implemented those standards but in some cases they had to be amended. Ethical standards are supporting the financial stability, because the compliance with them may have influence on the mitigation of reputation risk and operational risks (e.g., fraud, investment area).
Principle 5.	Internal Controls The insurance supervisor should be able to: – review the internal controls that the Board of Directors and management approve and apply, and request strengthening of the controls where necessary; and – require the Board of Directors to provide suitable prudential oversight, such as setting standards for underwriting risks and setting qualitative and quantitative standards for investment and liquidity management.
Description	FI looks upon the internal control mainly in two different ways; on-site inspections and review demanded accounts. Before an on-site-inspection FI demands the company to send guidelines and policies for review. FI also looks through protocols from meetings by the Board of Directors. That makes it possible to review the organizational structure and makes sure that the insurer for example has a clear delegation of authority. From the protocols FI can see if the Board gets correct and sufficient information before decisions are made. After that FI has a meeting with the Managing Director and the Chairman of the Board, where FI gets a brief presentation of the insurer and its organization. FI also meets the internal auditor, directors responsible for different areas and usually the investment staff. The on-site inspection produces a report where FI can make remarks or demand changes. If FI discovers serious inaccuracies or insufficient control the authority can give the insurer a critical comment depending on the importance of the failure concerned or an injunction to correct the failure. On-site inspections are done with support of rules and regulations. FI has issued detailed guidelines about internal control in general (FFFS 2000:3) and more specifics about underwriting and reinsurance risk (FFFS 2000:5)and valuation of technical provisions (FFFS 2000:4). FI also reviews insurers books (accounts). FI designates an auditor (appointed auditor) who reports to the authority and takes part in the audit of the insurer. FI also demands regular reports in specific areas.
Assessment	Observed.
Comments	In bigger companies the internal control is satisfying, of course there are always things to improve and FI often makes minor remarks. Generally FI makes more remarks to smaller companies, usually about the internal audit. However, concerning the current practice there is a tendency to make also more remarks to bigger undertakings. In accordance with guideline FFFS 2000:3 every insurer has to set up a reporting system referring to internal control/risk management. The risk management report is submitted to the Board of Directors. FI has the opportunity to review this report via its appointed auditor or the report has to be presented to the authority on demand. The report’s submission to FI is not mandatory. Because of the enhancing importance of the risk-based supervision for insurance undertakings, it should be implemented into the Insurance Business Act that the annual risk management report has to be presented to FI for scrutiny.
Principle 6.	Assets Standards should be established with respect to the assets of companies licensed to operate in the jurisdiction. Where insurance supervisors have the authority to establish the standards, these should apply at least to an amount of assets equal to the total of the technical provisions, and should address: – diversification by type; – any limits, or restrictions, on the amount that may be held in financial instruments, property, and receivables; – the basis for valuing assets which are included in the financial reports; – the safekeeping of assets; – appropriate matching of assets and liabilities; and – liquidity.
Description	In the law there are compulsory rules concerning the capital investment regarding the amount of assets equal to the technical provisions. The regulations address diversification by type of assets, the limits of the amount that may be held in the different types of assets and in an individual investment, the basis for valuing assets, appropriate matching off assets and liability, and liquidity. Safekeeping of assets and accountability for asset transactions is regulated in the regulations and general guidelines on register of assets equal to the technical provisions (FFFS 1996:30). According to the law the company shall set and observe a strategic investment policy concerning assets equal to the technical provisions. The Board of Directors shall adopt the policy. There are no regulations concerning the contents of the policy. In the general guidelines on management, internal information and internal control, there is a general requirement addressing the board on setting guidelines on handling of the risks that arise in the company’s operations. The types of risk defined in the guidelines are among those mentioned in the questionnaire. The scope of the guidelines should be that managing, identification and monitoring of the risks is satisfactory to ensure that the company can meet its commitments under insurance contracts in force. There should also be instructions that would ensure good internal control (see Principle 5). In addition, the delegation of responsibility should be defined. FI reviews the company’s guidelines. The review is carried out on an ad hoc basis by off-site inspection at the moment. This is a case-by-case procedure. If the authority considers the guidelines not in compliance with the law or insufficient this opinion is emphasized to the company to ensure the responsibility and control of the Board of Directors. However as long as the guidelines are not in conflict with the law the authority is not able to take any remedial actions.
Assessment	Observed.
Comments	The complete existing regulation gives FI sufficient remedy to act when necessary. FI applies a very simple stress test at the moment (FSSS 1997:5). FI intends to introduce a more sophisticated dynamic resilience test in 2002, although this kind of test is not explicitly required by the IAIS Insurance Core Principles. In life insurance the liabilities are most prudently assessed. The assets are assessed on the basis of market values. In non-life insurance on the liabilities side it is not allowed to discount the technical provisions. Their assessment is very close to the expected value. The annual premium is used as an estimator for the technical provisions. Assets are also assessed on the basis of market values. The policyholder’s surplus is not part of the technical provisions. In the case of unit linked policies the investment risk is transferred to the policyholders. The guaranteed interest rate amounts to 3.0 percent per annum at the moment. Concerning the segregation of the assets of policyholders and shareholders, FI established a general guideline on register of assets (FFFS 1996:30) equal to the technical provisions. An insurer’s unearned premium reserve is monitored by the company’s auditor and FI’s employees concerned. Relating to Chapter 7 Section 10g Insurance Business Act (1982:713) the insurance companies are required to set up an annual report on their strategic investment policy. This report is submitted to FI on demand only. On the other hand parts of those reports’ contents are disclosed to the public in the framework of economic journalism. Because of the shortfall of qualified staff, FI does not always have the possibility to react when, for example the reports from an insurer indicate a breach of investment regulation (increment of investment risks; see recommendation to Principle 1).
Principle 7.	Liabilities Insurance supervisors should establish standards with respect to the liabilities of companies licensed to operate in their jurisdiction. In developing the standards, the insurance supervisor should consider: – what is to be included as a liability of the company, for example, claims incurred but not paid, claims incurred but not reported, amounts owed to others, amounts owed that are in dispute, premiums received in advance, as well as the provision for policy liabilities or technical provisions that may be set by an actuary; – the standards for establishing policy liabilities or technical provisions; and – the amount of credit allowed reducing liabilities for amounts recoverable under reinsurance arrangements with a given reinsurer, making provision for the ultimate collectability.
Description	The liability of a company is described in Chapter 7, Section 1 Insurance Business Act (1982:713): A company’s technical provisions shall correspond to the amount that is required for the company to meet all liabilities that reasonably can be expected from policies issued. The technical provisions shall correspond to the company’s liability for: Claims, administration and other costs covering the remaining period of the contracts for policies in force. Claims incurred but not paid, costs for settling those claims and bonus due to payment (more non-life). Such bonus that is guaranteed as face value (= nominal value) or real value (reference to a commitment in relation to the consumer price index) and that is not covered by 1. or 2 (only in running contracts, which having guaranteed a bonus for enhancement of the sum insured (sequence of bonuses which are guaranteed for the corresponding rest of the insurance period); very seldom and not traditional in Sweden, therefore small amount). Such bonus that is dependent on changes in values of assets or technical results where the policyholder carries the financial risk. Equalization of losses in credit insurance (setting up of equalization reserves in the insurance class of credit insurance). Unit-linked insurance where the policyholder carries the financial risk. If more than one company hold the liability for a contract, each company’s technical provisions shall be calculated in proportion to each company’s liability under the contract. Technical provisions for incurred but not paid claims shall be assessed individually for each claim. They will be checked case by case by FI-staff. The review of those provisions is more a task of the auditors who are checking them regularly. The calculation is regulated in the EU-Accounting Directive. On the company’s side the actuaries are responsible for the correct calculation of the technical provisions both in life insurance and non-life insurance. Exchange of information takes place between FI and actuaries in auditor firms. In addition, IBNR (claims incurred but not reported), amounts in dispute, and premiums received in advance should be included in the technical provisions. For life business the technical provision should be the difference between the present value of the company’s liability and the present value of premiums that the company can expect according to the contract. For non-life the technical provision for unearned premiums shall be calculated in such a way that it is always equal to the provisions for each individual policy. The provision for unpaid claims shall include the future costs related to the policies in force. There is no specific limit for reduction of liabilities for amount recoverable under reinsurance arrangement. But, FI may reject the amount of credit allowed to reduce liabilities if the reinsurer or the reinsurance contract does not meet the standards that is deemed necessary in some respect.
Assessment	Observed.
Comments	According to the general guideline (FFFS 2000:4) the Board of Directors is responsible for instructions concerning technical provisions and liabilities. The instructions shall take into consideration different risks and products. They shall also ensure that there are satisfactory controls concerning the technical provisions. There are quarterly reports concerning assets covering liabilities. At least on a yearly basis there is an analysis of the technical provisions where companies are compared with each other and also over the years. If this analysis gives reasons for concern, the company is contacted. In accordance with Chapter 7 Section 3 Insurance Business Act (1982:713) both life and non-life insurers are required to introduce technical principles concerning the technical bases for calculation, premiums, reinsurance, solvency etc. which have to be adopted by the insurer’s Board of Directors. The life-insurance companies have to notify FI of the technical bases applied. There are also prescriptions in the above-mentioned Section for formulating further details (formulas, statistical bases) both for life and non-life insurers. Those principles do not have to be presented completely to FI. To calculate the technical provisions for incurred but not paid claims in non-life insurance FI applies the following method: FI calculates the ratio “r = (technical provision for incurred but not paid claims/premiums written)” for each non-life insurer on an annual basis. “r” is a random variable. The sample expected value and the sample variance of “r” are calculated. The average sample values of the non-life insurance industry are the criteria for the assessment. It is assumed that “r” is allocated in accordance with the normal distribution. If FI has collected a sufficient number of data then it should apply a goodness of fit test to improve the distribution assumption (e.g., log-normal distribution) eventually, provided that the collection of data is representative for the analysis concerned.
Principle 8.	Capital Adequacy and Solvency The requirements regarding the capital to be maintained by companies which are licensed, or seeking a license, in the jurisdiction should be clearly defined and should address the minimum levels of capital or the levels of deposits that should be maintained. Capital adequacy requirements should reflect the size, complexity, and business risks of the company in the jurisdiction.
Description	Regarding capital adequacy and solvency Sweden is following EU jurisdiction as far as possible. Local jurisdiction reflects for all main purposes EU rules and complementary regulations are few. In connection with a company seeking a license in the jurisdiction FI requires three years business plans. In order to give a license FI should consider the business plan as realistic and the solvency in the end of the three years period should fulfill the requirements according to the jurisdiction. The jurisdiction does not regulate the size of capital required–the evaluation is performed by FI and can vary from case to case depending on the concrete circumstances. Each company–life and non-life reports yearly in the end of May the solvency status. The reporting is registered and reviewed electronically. Insurers with material declines in solvency margin since the prior reporting period or reporting a solvency margin below the required minimum levels are followed up manually. FI contacts insurance companies that are considered to have problems to discuss measures for improving the solvency margin.
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	FI complies with the corresponding EU-directives. As of today the solvency requirement is measured and evaluated on a yearly basis. Though this topic is currently under discussion and in the near future FI will have a requirement that at given time intervals, insurance companies assess the amount of their available solvency margins (capital) (Solvency I). FI’s experience is that difference in assets markets values is the single major reason for changes in solvency margin during a year. FI requires the insurance companies in difficulties to present a plan for quick restoring of capital in compliance with the solvency rules. Concerning an insurance company’s seeking license according to jurisdiction, it is common that FI has the permission to intervene and require the insurance company to hold capital at a higher level than the required minimum margin where circumstances exist to justify such an action. For older companies FI’s practice is not so clear, but in principle FI has the described option. A disclosure note in the register is needed in order to inform FI whether parts of the assets are not free (collaterals), or can not be applied to covering the technical reserves. In spring 2002 FI intends to introduce qualitative risk assessment for insurance risks. Extending the application of risk-based supervisory tools as envisaged next year is a welcome development. Up to now FI could not comment on the requirement that the inflation of supervisory capital through double/multiple gearing or other financing techniques in an “insurance group” should be eliminated and the structure of the “insurance group” should be transparent (essential criterion 10 of CP 8). This is because the formulating of the corresponding regulation has still not been finalized. Effecting the appropriate regulation as envisaged on January 1, 2002 is a welcome development.
Principle 9.	Derivatives and ‘Off-Balance Sheet’ Items The insurance supervisor should be able to set requirements with respect to the use of financial instruments that may not form a part of the financial report of a company licensed in the jurisdiction. In setting these requirements, the insurance supervisor should address: – restrictions in the use of derivatives and other off-balance sheet items; – disclosure requirements for derivatives and other off-balance sheet items; and – the establishment of adequate internal controls and monitoring of derivative positions.
Description	According to the law (Chapter 7 Section 17b Insurance Business Act, 1982:713) the use of derivatives is restricted only to reduce the financial risk and to rationalize the management of the assets. The supervisory authority has been given the right to issue regulations concerning the application of the law. This right has not been used, because there are no such rules on Swedish banks either. Moreover, see principle 6 above. Even if there are no regulations concerning the application of the law the authority constantly reviews the capital investments and has the possibility to take remedial actions regarding the responsibility of the Board of Directors to ensure that the business is pursued to maintain a sufficient equity, liquidity and control over, among other things, investment risks. Disclosure requirements should be established for derivatives and other off-balance sheet items. FI’s control of adequate internal controls and monitoring of derivative positions is done within on- site inspections concerning internal controls and via the appointed auditors (see recommendation to Principle 5).
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	FI issues regulations and general guidelines concerning the annual and interim reports of insurance companies (FFFS 2000:22). These regulations include disclosure requirements for derivatives and off-balance sheet items. The disclosure requirements for derivatives and off-balance sheet items include quantitative as well as qualitative disclosure requirements. The disclosure requirements are to a high extent based on IAS 32 (Financial Instruments: disclosure and presentation). The application of mark to market values as shown in IAS 32 is better than the application of historical values Disclosure requirements should be established for derivatives and off-balance sheet items. FI’s requirements are fulfilled: FI requires insurers using derivatives to have in place an appropriate policy for their use, formulated and approved by the Board of Directors. Furthermore, FI requires that this policy should be consistent with the company’s activities, its overall strategic investment policy and asset/liability management strategy, and its risk tolerance. The policy concerned complies with the main elements described in the essential criteria 9.3. It addresses the following main elements: the purposes for which derivatives can be used; the establishment of appropriately structured exposure limits for derivatives taking into account the purpose of their use and the uncertainty caused by market credit, liquidity, cash flow, operation and legal risk; the extent to which the holding of some types of derivatives is restricted or not authorized; and the delineation of lines of responsibility and a framework of accountability for derivatives functions.
Principle 10.	Reinsurance Insurance companies use reinsurance as a means of risk containment. The insurance supervisor must be able to review reinsurance arrangements, to assess the degree of reliance placed on these arrangements and to determine the appropriateness of such reliance. Insurance companies would be expected to assess the financial positions of their reinsurers in determining an appropriate level of exposure to them. The insurance supervisor should set requirements with respect to reinsurance contracts or reinsurance companies addressing: – the amount of the credit taken for reinsurance ceded. The amount of credit taken should reflect an assessment of the ultimate collectability of the reinsurance recoverable and may take into account the supervisory control over the reinsurer; and – the amount of reliance placed on the insurance supervisor of the reinsurance business of a company which is incorporated in another jurisdiction.
Description	According to the Insurance Business Act pure reinsurance companies are equal to primary insurers. However there are some special rules: Investment restrictions: – the investment restriction applies to primary insurers. – pure reinsurers do not comprise of the rules except life reinsurers and long-term non-life reinsurer. – if a company has both primary insurance and reinsurance, investment restrictions are applied to the whole companies business. Rules concerning members of the board: – pure reinsures do not need to have a special member of the board for the insured interests. FI issued in 1995, brought up to date in 2000, a general guideline on management of underwriting risk and reinsurance within insurance companies (FFFS 2000:5). This guideline is not compulsory for the insurance companies. If a company does not follow the guideline the company has to account for their solution. Then it is up to FI to judge if that solution is good enough. The general guideline concern the main non-life companies, but where applicable it relates to all kind of insurance. According to the guideline the Board of Directors should establish a reinsurance program regarding reinsurance ceded. The reinsurance program should include among others principles for ceding reinsurance, self-retention, and general guidelines for the choice of reinsures (i.e., security). FI’s supervision of reinsurance is done through: 1. On-site inspection, in accordance with the general guideline FFFS 2000:5. The focus of inspections have been that the Board of Directors takes its responsibility in according to the general guideline, the company has appropriate routines and the internal control is good. 2. Companies with a big part of ceded reinsurance are asked in the beginning of the year to give a written description of their greater reinsurance contract. FI especially wants to know about the security of the reinsures they use. Companies who use reinsures with a low security will be followed up. 3. A model to assess the companies ceding of large exposures is under processing. According to the supervision of pure reinsurance companies in practice it is limited to licensing, reporting of the annual report and the solvency report. In Sweden today there are only a few Swedish reinsurance companies in business. Most of the big insurance groups have set their reinsurance companies in run-off.
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	Pure reinsurance companies are supervised in almost the same way as primary insurance undertakings. FI has set up a general guideline (FFFS 2000:5). According to the general guideline the Board of Directors should take a reinsurance policy concerning ceded reinsurance. Because of the shortfall of qualified staff FI is not able to scrutinize the reinsurance contracts regularly (increment of reinsurance risk; see recommendation to Principle 1). Primary insurers ceded reinsurance will be supervised through on site inspections, although the frequency has not yet been stipulated. Used reinsures security will be supervised through the yearly questionnaire. A model that assesses the companies ceding large exposures is on the way. This helps FI and insurers to identify major risks and to take measures to cover these risks. Introducing this supervisory instrument, as envisaged in 2002 is a welcome development.
Principle 11.	Market Conduct Insurance supervisors should ensure that insurers and intermediaries exercise the necessary knowledge, skills, and integrity in dealing with their customers. Insurers and intermediaries should: – at all times act honestly and in a straightforward manner; – act with due skill, care, and diligence in conducting their business activities; – conduct their business and organize their affairs with prudence; – pay due regard to the information needs of their customers and treat them fairly; – seek from their customers information which might reasonably be expected before giving advice or concluding a contract; – avoid conflicts of interest; – deal with their regulators in an open and cooperative way; – support a system of complaints handling, where applicable; and – organize and control their affairs effectively.
Description	Acquisition of insurance is FI’s responsibility but marketing is not. An insurance broker has to have certain skills to get licensed by FI (FFFS 1996:19). FI has issued rules about experience and theoretical knowledge for brokers. A person who gets a license must be fit and proper. The insurance companies have full responsibility for all other persons selling insurance. In conducting an on-site inspection on internal control, FI usually gets information about a company’s selling-organization and its policy in that area. Life and non-life insurance are usually separated in this exercise. In life insurance FI now focuses on information given to the insured as well as presumptive customers. It is very important that the customer understands the information given by the companies and that the information is relevant to the customer. At present FI makes on-site inspections to see how insurers prepare themselves for the newly issued information-rules. When selling a non-life insurance it is very important that the broker or the seller figures out the customers needs. FI does not accept that a person should be twice insured for the same risk. Therefore the broker or seller needs relevant information from the customer. It is not so common that FI makes on-site inspections in this area. But FI usually makes on-site inspections to see how insurers deal with claims and specialty personal injuries. FI thinks it is important that the injured gets compensation on objective grounds even without the assistance of a lawyer, and that the company deals with its claim in due order with secrecy. FI reviews how companies deal with customer complaints. Every company has to appoint a person who is responsible for customer complaints. FI has listed all appointed persons in a register and can assist claimants with information. In conducting an on-site inspection on internal control, FI always demands to see the guidelines for handling complaints (FFFS 1996:25). FI does not handle complaints but can use the information. FI starts an off-site inspection to investigate how a company deals with complaints, if it gets a lot of similar complaints.
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	Due to insufficient resources in the insurance division of FI the authority does not usually make on-site inspections at insurance-brokers, ad hoc-inspections not included. FI receives a lot of information that brokers do not fulfill the requirements but FI does not have the possibility to respond on such information. In general in Sweden it is difficult to have any supervision concerning market conduct, which presents an increment of underwriting risk (see recommendation to Principle 1). Normally FI has no problems with market conduct. FI acts against complaints, reads about grievances in newspapers or otherwise receives information about grievances. FI has during recent years made companies’ inspections on claims and personal injuries. In general it takes too long for companies to handle personal injuries. This is caused by a certain shortage of adjusters and therefore it is difficult to overcome this problem. It is recommended to establish procedures to ensure that companies are in compliance with legislation and guidelines.
Principle 12.	Financial Reporting It is important that insurance supervisors get the information they need to properly form an opinion on the financial strength of the operations of each insurance company in their jurisdiction. The information needed to carry out this review and analysis is obtained from the financial and statistical reports that are filed on a regular basis, supported by information obtained through special information requests, on-site inspections, and communication with actuaries and external auditors. A process should be established for: – setting the scope and frequency of reports requested and received from all companies licensed in the jurisdiction, including financial reports, statistical reports, actuarial reports, and other information; – setting the accounting requirements for the preparation of financial reports in the jurisdiction; – ensuring that external audits of insurance companies operating in the jurisdiction are acceptable; and – setting the standards for the establishment of technical provisions or policy and other liabilities to be included in the financial reports in the jurisdiction. In so doing, a distinction may be made: – between the standards that apply to reports and calculations prepared for disclosure to policyholders and investors, and those prepared for the insurance supervisor; and – between the financial reports and calculations prepared for companies incorporated in the jurisdiction, and branch operations of companies incorporated in another jurisdiction.
Description	According to Insurance Business Act, Insurance Business Decree and other laws (Insurance Brokers Act, Friendly Societies Act) FI has the permission to set the scope and frequency of reports requested, including financial reports, statistical reports and actuarial reports, and received from all companies licensed in the jurisdiction. There are quite a few regulations issued by FI that regulate the collection of statistical data. There are for instance regulations concerning: profit and loss accounts; performance analysis; solvency; analysis of profitability; cross-border activities; and assets (quarterly reports). The external auditors in Sweden have a good reputation as competent and independent. FI has the permission to appoint an auditor. An appointed auditor works for FI, but is paid for by the company. He has the same rights and responsibilities as the auditors appointed by the general meeting. FI has appointed auditors in nation-wide larger insurance companies and in companies with known problems. FI has the permission to stipulate the principles and norms regarding accounting and consolidation techniques (groups and conglomerates (IAS 22, 27 (consolidated financial statements) to be used for the purposes of reports provided to it for supervisory purposes. All listed companies in Sweden agree upon the recommendation of the Swedish Accounting Standard Counsel. FI requires insurance companies to utilize valuation rules that are consistent, realistic and prudent. FI has the permission to issue principles for the establishment of technical provisions (policy liabilities) and other liabilities to be included in the financial reports in the jurisdiction (FFFS 2000:22 pages 18, 20).
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	FI has the permission to request the information the authority needs. This is also done regarding to the actual laws. A review of the requested reporting has started. The aim of the review is to find out if it is possible to reduce the amount of information reported to FI. Insurance companies in Sweden have to comply with the accounting regulations in the Annual Accounts Act for Insurance Companies, “Lagen om årsredovisning i försäkringsföretag, (1995:1560), ÅRFL” The act is partly an implementation of the Insurance Accounting Directive, 91/674/EEG, IAD. ÅRFL refers to a great extent (mainly related to accounting issues not specific for financial institutions) to paragraphs in the Annual Accounts Act, “Årsredovisningslagen, (1995:1554), ÅRL.” ÅRL applies to general companies, and is the result of the Swedish implementation of the fourth and seventh EU Company directives on annual accounts and consolidated accounts. According to Chapter 1 Section 4 of ÅRFL, FI has the right to issue binding regulations in the accounting area. FI has issued such regulations and general guidelines that consist of. Regulations that implement certain parts of the IAD; Clarifications of ÅRFL, and more detailed accounting regulation on accounting for financial instruments and insurance contracts. So the accounting laws provide the legal framework and the more detailed regulation is provided by the binding regulations issued by FI. In the annual financial statements, insurance companies must state whether they comply with the regulations issued by FI. Any deviation must be disclosed and could render a qualified opinion by the auditor. The Annual Accounts Act for Insurance Companies states that all Swedish insurance companies must issue annual reports. The regulations issued by FI state that insurance companies with net assets exceeding SKR 1 million must publish one interim report yearly. In FI’s opinion the auditors in general are acceptable and have a high standard in knowledge and independence. Under certain circumstances insurance companies are required to utilize valuation rules that are consistent, realistic and prudent. Under certain circumstances and special provisions in the Insurance Business Act (Försäkringsrörelselagen) (Chapter 7 Sections 1, 2), FI has the permission to issue principles for the establishment of technical provisions (policy liabilities) and other liabilities to be included in the financial reports in the jurisdiction (FFFS 1998:25 (discount-rate)). The actuarial report needs to be amended: (a) Life insurance: the Responsible Actuary should take into account the asset-side when forming an opinion of the financial status of the company. A corresponding prescription should be incorporated into the Insurance Business Act. (b) Non-life insurance: non-life actuaries are reporting more about the reserves’ development. Hence for reasons of the quality-guarantee of the actuarial report the non-life Responsible Actuary should sign his report. This procedure should be written into a FI-regulation.
Principle 13.	On-Site Inspection The insurance supervisor should be able to: – carry out on-site inspections to review the business and affairs of the company, including the inspection of books, records, accounts, and other documents. This may be limited to the operation of the company in the jurisdiction or, subject to the agreement of the respective supervisors, include other jurisdictions in which the company operates; and – request and receive any information from companies licensed in its jurisdiction, whether this information be specific to a company or be requested of all companies.
Description	FI’s activities are guided by legislation. The Insurance Business Act also stipulates that the Board of Directors, managing directors and other officers responsible for the business are obliged to provide requested information to FI. FI can review company-branches, and has a bilateral MOU with Kredittilsynet in Norway about inspections and information concerning an insurance company. FI works with different manuals and FI usually demand written information before visiting a company. For larger insurers, an on site inspection lasts 2-3 days and is carried out at least once a year. The on site inspection procedure starts with sending a special questionnaire designed by FI to the concerning insurer. After a certain period the insurance company submits its answers FI. FI analyzes the company’s reply. Usually the result of the analysis leads to further questions, which are discussed with the company’s senior people during FI’s company visit. Afterwards FI sends an official letter including the on site inspection report to the inspected insurer for comments. The report is revised. The final report is sent to the insurance undertaking for information only.
Assessment	Observed.
Comments	FI has not had problems in getting the information it needs or in conducting inspections. Normally FI gives companies time to prepare a visit. For the IAIS assessment, FI has demanded information the same day or arranged a meeting in a few days.
Principle 14.	Sanctions Insurance supervisors must have the power to take remedial action where problems involving licensed companies are identified. The insurance supervisor must have a range of actions available in order to apply appropriate sanctions to problems encountered. The legislation should set out the powers available to the insurance supervisor and may include: – the power to restrict the business activities of a company, for example, by withholding approval for new activities or acquisitions; – the power to direct a company to stop practices that are unsafe or unsound, or to take action to remedy an unsafe or unsound business practice; and – the option to invoke other sanctions on a company or its business operation in the jurisdiction, for example, by revoking the license of a company or imposing remedial measures where a company violates the insurance laws of the jurisdiction.
Description	According to the law (Chapter 2 Section 3 Insurance Business Act (1982:713)) the FI shall refuse a license if the company has a close connection to someone that will hinders the effective supervision. If the company no longer meets the requirements for license FI shall revoke the license. According to the law (Chapter 19 Section 11 Insurance Business Act (1982:713)) FI may issue a reminder when appraised necessary. In more severe cases, defined in the law (Chapter 19 Section 11 Insurance Business Act (1982:713)), FI shall issue an injunction. The purpose of a reminder and an injunction is to oblige the company to comply with FI’s decision. Severe cases mentioned in the law are, among other things, that the company does not comply with the regulations or if someone in the management of the company is no longer considered suitable. An injunction can be combined with a conditional fine. If the company does not comply with the injunction FI may also revoke the license. In practice FI usually first makes an informal reminder. If the company does not make a correction after that FI will take measures as mentioned above. FI also has the power to restrict the company’s freedom to dispose of assets. Different kinds of control measure enable FI to detect the kind of disparities that require remedial actions. The type of action and the time limitation for carrying it out depends on the seriousness of the case and the consequences it may have for the insured. If formal sanctions are imposed FI addresses the company and the Board of Directors. They are requested to submit a plan for the measure proposed and a recovery plan within a certain time, which depends on the measure, to be approved by FI. According to the law (Chapter 19 Section 11 Insurance Business Act (1982:713)) FI has the power to restrict the company’s freedom to dispose of assets in Sweden in situations defined in the law (Chapter 19 Section 11 Insurance Business Act (1982:713)). This is the case if the financial position of the company deteriorates in an inadmissible way. This measure may also be taken in order to protect the interests of the insured in case of a revoked license. In case of a winding up FI may appoint a special liquidator with the assignment of carrying through the winding up together with the liquidators appointed by the general meeting. If the capital base falls below the solvency margin FI is obliged to issue an injunction in order to oblige the company to take measures to restore its financial equilibrium. The company is obliged to submit a recovery plan. According to the law (Chapter 19 Section 11 Insurance Business Act (1982:713)) FI has the power to issue an injunction in order to oblige the managing director or the Board of Directors to make proper applications for registration and to provide certain information on letters, invoices and order forms. This is the only kind of sanctions for which FI has the power to address to the natural persons. They may however be prosecuted according to criminal law and sentenced in a general court.
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	FI has the power to take remedial actions when necessary. On the whole FI is given the possibility of choosing an adequate sanction. However FI is lacking in the possibility of issuing a formal criticism in cases where there is a need for a sharp reprimand but not obliging the company to take measures.
Principle 15.	Cross-Border Business Operations Insurance companies are becoming increasingly international in scope, establishing branches and subsidiaries outside their home jurisdiction, and sometimes conducting cross-border business on a services basis only. The insurance supervisor should ensure that: – no foreign insurance establishment escapes supervision; – all insurance establishments of international insurance groups and international insurers are subject to effective supervision; – the creation of a cross-border insurance establishment is subject to consultation between host and home supervisors; and – foreign insurers providing insurance cover on a cross-border services basis are subject to effective supervision.
Description	The provisions concerning cross-border business operations are written in Chapter 2a Insurance Business Act (1982:713) and in Chapter 2 Act on Foreign Insurance Companies operating in Sweden (1998:293). FI acts in accordance with the Directives on life assurance and non-life insurance. It also acts in accordance with the protocol relating to the collaboration of the supervisory authorities of the Member States of the European Community in particular in the application of the Directives on life assurance and non-life insurance. For EEA insurers, home country control and the principle of one single license are valid, according to the third generation EC insurance directives as implemented into Swedish legislation. The activities of a Swiss insurer in Sweden are regulated in accordance with the special arrangements between Switzerland and the EC, as implemented in Swedish law (FFFS 1996:222). Cross-border activities are possible for EEA insurers after a prescribed notification procedure to the home country authority of the head-office. For an EEA insurer, the home country authorities are responsible for supervision and the capital requirements of the home country apply. For a non-EEA insurer, the same rules apply as for domestic companies. Chapter 4 Act on Foreign Insurance Companies operating in Sweden contains provisions concerning non-EEA insurers. For non-EEA insurers, cross-border activities without authorization are only possible through intermediation by an independent insurance broker or when insurance is sought actively by the policyholder. Otherwise they can operate only through an insurer authorized in Sweden with whom they have an agreement of cooperation or if they both belong to the same group of companies. Authorization from FI is then needed. The creations of cross-border insurance establishment are subject to consultation between host and home supervisors. The supervisory authorities involved are obliged to conduct a mutual consultation before approving a transfer of portfolio, according to the Chapter 9 Section 7 Act on Foreign Insurance Companies operating in Sweden.
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	It is not clear whether Sweden is in a position to actively supervise branches of Swedish-based insurers in other EEA member States in practice, given the very limited resources of the supervisor (see recommendation to Principle 1). There is only one foreign insurance undertaking which is operating business in Sweden. This financial institution is a general agency of the Swiss insurer ZFS (Zürich Financial Services) running non-life insurance business in Sweden only. The general agent has been licensed by FI. FI supervises all legal matters of this general agency (e.g., claims compensation, fit and proper aspects etc.) while the Swiss insurance supervisory authority does all financial matters (e.g., solvency, accounting etc.)
Principle 16.	Coordination and Cooperation Increasingly, insurance supervisors liaise with each other to ensure that each is aware of the other’s concerns with respect to an insurance company that operates in more than one jurisdiction, either directly or through a separate corporate entity. In order to share relevant information with other insurance supervisors, adequate and effective communication should be developed and maintained. In developing or implementing a regulatory framework, consideration should be given to whether the insurance supervisor: – is able to enter into an agreement or understanding with any other supervisor both in other jurisdictions and in other sectors of the industry (i.e., insurance, banking, or securities) to share information or otherwise work together; – is permitted to share information, or otherwise work together, with an insurance supervisor in another jurisdiction. This may be limited to insurance supervisors who have agreed, and are legally able, to treat the information as confidential; – should be informed of findings of investigations where power to investigate fraud, money laundering, and other such activities rests with a body other than the insurance supervisor; and – is permitted to set out the types of information and the basis on which information obtained by the insurance supervisor may be shared.
Description	FI in Sweden does the supervision of the financial sector. Within FI everyone has access to information. Exchange of information between authorities is subject to secrecy legislation. FI has the authority to come to an agreement with a foreign financial supervisory authority. It has been done with Kredittilsynet (Norwegian financial supervisory authority) about a non-life company, if it is a Swedish non-life company and has about 40 percent of the Norwegian insurance business of the private area. In the agreement it is stipulated that the two authorities will exchange information. A company supervised by FI has an obligation to inform FI if they have been exposed to an attempt to fraud, money laundering, etc. Regarding the remaining part of the principle, refer to principle 17 below.
Assessment	Observed.
Comments	All information within FI is public. If someone asks for certain information from FI concerning a company FI has to do a secrecy trial before FI can set out information. Information concerning business secrets is always classified. If FI has signed an agreement of cooperation concerning the supervision of a special company, and the duty of confidentiality is agreed it is possible to share classified information. FI supervises seven financial conglomerates. In connection with this supervision FI carries out an overall assessment for 13 entities: 6 insurance companies, 4 banking groups, and 3 security firms.
Principle 17.	Confidentiality All insurance supervisors should be subject to professional secrecy constraints in respect of information obtained in the course of their activities, including during the conduct of on-site inspections. The insurance supervisor is required to hold confidential any information received from other insurance supervisors, except where constrained by law or in situations where the insurance supervisor who provided the information provides authorization for its release. Jurisdictions whose confidentiality requirements continue to constrain or prevent the sharing of information for supervisory purposes with insurance supervisors in other jurisdictions, and jurisdictions where information received from another insurance supervisor cannot be kept confidential, are urged to review their requirements.
Description	FI has the statutory power to share prudential information with other supervisors with few limitations, provided it is deemed to be in the Swedish interests to share the information. In accordance with the Act (1982:713) on the Insurance business, FI has a duty to have a close cooperation with supervisors, especially in other EU-countries. FI participates also several international cooperations, e.g., IAIS. Importantly, according to Swedish legislation, a disclosure of information requires normally a consideration of a possible harm that might follow in each single case. This consideration of harm will be based on Swedish law, primarily on the Act on Secrecy. The act does not accept a general principle of originated control of secrecy between authorities. On the contrary, by Swedish law, one can not normally maintain the confidentiality of the exchanged information, once it is provided to another authority. Information, once has been handed out, is in principle at the receiver’s disposal. An exception to that principle is the information received from another foreign authority according to a MOU. The right of a Swedish authority to disclose information about professional secrecy is set out in Chapter 1 Section 3 of the Act on Secrecy (1980:100). Information classified as secret in accordance with the Act on Secrecy must not be disclosed to a foreign authority in any other way than pursuant to a provision in law or ordinance. Alternatively, if the information may be forwarded to a Swedish authority and it is deemed to be consistent with Swedish interests, the information may also be released to the foreign authority. Thus, this provision gives FI a fairly good possibility to disclose documents and information to competent authorities in other countries. The obligation of FI to inform other authorities is to a large extent relevant for the type of information that the Act on Secrecy refers to. According to Chapter 8 Section 5 of the Secrecy Act, secrecy shall apply in such activities of a public authority that consist of the issuance of permits or licenses or supervision with regard to the banking, insurance and secrecy business and information regarding: the business or management conditions on the part of an undertaking subject to supervision, if it may be assumed that a disclosure of the information will harm the company, the financial or personal conditions on the part of anyone else, who has entered into a business relation or a similar relation with a party subject to supervision. Furthermore, also according to Chapter 8 Section 5 of the Secrecy Act, the government may decide that secrecy applies at FI on information that FI has received according to an agreement with a foreign authority. If the Swedish government adds such an agreement between FI and a foreign supervisory authority to Section 1c of the Secrecy Ordinance (SFS 1980:657), confidentiality is thus preserved at FI concerning information received according to the agreement. The government has so far always decided that secrecy applies on information that FI has received according to memoranda of understanding (MOU), and those agreements has always been added to Section 1c of the Secrecy Ordinance. The referred provisions in the Act on Secrecy are - according to the Swedish legislators - applicable to such information that is provided according to provisions based on the EU-directives. In insurance there are only a few MOU’s. Additionally there are the “Protocol relating to the collaboration of the supervisory authorities of the member states of the European community in particular in the application of the directives on life assurance and non-life insurance” and the so-called “Helsinki-Protocol” concerning insurance groups. According to 1.4 of this agreement the supervisory authorities has agreed to exchange confidential information whenever possible within the limits of the rules laid down in the Third Life and Non-life Directives (Articles 16.1 and 16.2 of the Third Non-life Directive and 15.1 and 15.2 of the Third Life Directive) in order to improve the effectiveness of insurance supervision in the European Community.
Assessment	Broadly observed.
Comments	The principle has been implemented by law, MOUs and to some extent by the Protocol. A case by case approach is more traditionally than general principles. FI has negotiated several cross-sectoral MOUs with Norway, Baltic countries and Denmark, Finland, Norway as a group. In order to achieve a completely free exchange of information, including facts that could be regarded as negative to an institute subject to supervision, not only a certain modification of the Swedish Act on Secrecy but also an international convention on the subject or a bilateral agreement between the authorities in different states is required.